39311129-modeling-160-enu
TRANSCRIPT
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 1/260
Tekla Structures
Modeling Manual
Product version 16.0
December 2009
© 2010 Tekla Corporation
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 2/260
© 2010 Tekla Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This Software Manual has been developed for use with the referenced Software. Use of the Software, and use of thisSoftware Manual are governed by a License Agreement. Among other provisions, the License Agreement sets certainwarranties for the Software and this Manual, disclaims other warranties, limits recoverable damages, definespermitted uses of the Software, and determines whether you are an authorized user of the Software. All informationset forth in this manual is provided with the warranty set forth in the License Agreement. Please refer to the License
Agreement for important obligations and applicable limitations and restrictions on your rights. Tekla does notguarantee that the text is free of technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Tekla reserves the right to makechanges and additions to this manual due to changes in the software or otherwise.
In addition, this Software Manual is protected by copyright law and by international treaties. Unauthorizedreproduction, display, modification, or distribution of this Manual, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil andcriminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the full extent permitted by law.
Tekla, Tekla Structures, Xcity, Xengineer, Xpipe, Xroad, Xpower, Xsteel, and Xstreet are either registered trademarksor trademarks of Tekla Corporation in the European Union, the United States, and/or other countries. Other productand company names mentioned in this Manual are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. By referring to athird-party product or brand, Tekla does not intend to suggest an affiliation with or endorsement by such third partyand disclaims any such affiliation or endorsement, except where otherwise expressly stated.
Portions of this software:
D-Cubed 2D DCM © 2008 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved.
EPM toolkit © 1995-2004 EPM Technology a.s., Oslo, Norway. All rights reserved.
XML parser © 1999 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Project Data Control Library © 2006 - 2007 DlhSoft. All rights reserved.
DWGdirect, DGNdirect and OpenDWG Toolkit/Viewkit libraries © 1998-2005 Open Design Alliance. All rightsreserved.
FlexNet Copyright © 2006 Flexera Software Limited. All Rights Reserved. This product contains proprietary andconfidential technology provided by and owned by Flexera Software Limited Of Schaumburg, IL, USA. Any use,copying, publication, distribution, display, modification, or transmission of such technology in whole or in part in anyform or by any means without the prior express written permission of Flexera Software Limited is strictly prohibited.Except where expressly provided by Flexera Software Limited in writing, possession of this technology shall not be
construed to confer any license or rights under any of Flexera Software´s intellectual property rights, whether byestoppel, implication, or otherwise.
The software is protected by U.S. Patent 7,302,368. Also elements of the software described in this Manual may bethe subject of pending patent applications in the European Union and/or other countries including U.S. patentapplications 2004031231, 2004267695, 2005285881, 2006000484 and 200613639.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 3/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 3
Conventions used in this guide
Typographicalconventions
The following typographical conventions are used in this guide:
Noteboxes The following types of noteboxes are used in this guide:
Font Usage
Bold Any text that you see in the user interface appears in bold. This fontis used, for example, for window and dialog box titles, box andbutton names, and list items.
Italic bold New terms are in italic bold when they appear in the current contextfor the first time.
Monospace Extracts of program code, HTML, or other material that you wouldnormally edit in a text editor, appear in monospaced font.
This font is also used for file names and folder paths, and for anytext that you should type yourself.
A tip might introduce a shortcut, or suggest alternative ways of doingthings.
A note draws attention to details that you might easily overlook. It canalso point you to other information in this guide that you might finduseful.
You should always read very important notes and warnings, like thisone. They will help you avoid making serious mistakes, or wasting yourtime.
This symbol indicates advanced or highly technical information that
is usually of interest only to advanced or technically-oriented readers.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 4/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 4
Contents
Conventions used in this guide ........................................................................................................................... 3
1 Creat ing 3D Models ................................................................................. 15
1.1 What is a 3D model.............................................................................................................................. 15
1.2 Creating a new model........................................................................................................................... 16
1.3 Opening a model.................................................................................................................................. 17
1.4 Saving a model..................................................................................................................................... 17Saving a model with a different name or location............................................................................ 17
1.5 Model templates................................................................................................................................... 18
Creating a model template............................................................................................................... 18
2 Setting up the Workspace ...................................................................... 21
2.1 Screen layout........................................................................................................................................ 21
Changing the background color....................................................................................................... 23
Background color examples............................................................................................................. 23
2.2 Work area............................................................................................................................................. 25
Defining the work area..................................................................................................................... 26
Hiding the work area........................................................................................................................ 26
2.3 Work plane............................................................................................................................................ 27
Shifting the work plane..................................................................................................................... 27
Restoring the default work plane...................................................................................................... 28
Changing the color of the work plane grid........................................................................................ 28
2.4 Coordinate system................................................................................................................................ 28
2.5 Grids..................................................................................................................................................... 29
Creating a grid.................................................................................................................................. 30
Grid coordinates ........................................................................................................................ 30
Grid labels ................................................................................................................................. 31
Modifying a grid................................................................................................................................ 31
Deleting a grid.................................................................................................................................. 31
Changing the grid color.................................................................................................................... 31
Grid lines.......................................................................................................................................... 32
Creating a single grid line .......................................................................................................... 32
Modifying a single grid line ........................................................................................................ 33
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 5/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 5
Deleting a single grid line .......................................................................................................... 33
2.6 Views.................................................................................................................................................... 33
Should I model in a 3D or plane view?............................................................................................. 34
Creating a view................................................................................................................................ 35
About naming views .................................................................................................................. 35View types ................................................................................................................................. 36
View planes ............................................................................................................................... 36
Moving a view plane .................................................................................................................. 37
Creating grid views .................................................................................................................... 38
Opening a view................................................................................................................................ 38
Modifying a view............................................................................................................................... 38
Deleting a view................................................................................................................................. 38
Switching between open views........................................................................................................ 39
Switching between 3D and plane view............................................................................................. 39
Refreshing views.............................................................................................................................. 39
Arranging views................................................................................................................................ 39
2.7 Construction objects............................................................................................................................. 40
Creating a construction plane.......................................................................................................... 40
Creating a construction line.............................................................................................................. 41
Creating a construction circle........................................................................................................... 41
2.8 Points.................................................................................................................................................... 42
Creating a point................................................................................................................................ 42
Importing points................................................................................................................................ 422.9 Reference models................................................................................................................................. 43
Inserting a reference model............................................................................................................. 44
Modifying reference model properties.............................................................................................. 44
Selecting a reference model............................................................................................................ 45
Hiding a reference model................................................................................................................. 45
Highlighting a reference model........................................................................................................ 45
Updating reference models.............................................................................................................. 45
Detecting changes in a reference model.......................................................................................... 45
Viewing reference model layers....................................................................................................... 46Reference model objects................................................................................................................. 47
Selecting a reference model object ........................................................................................... 48
Splitting a reference model into reference model objects .......................................................... 48
Supported DGN objects................................................................................................................... 48
3 Creating and Modifying Structures ........................................................ 51
3.1 Parts ..................................................................................................................................................... 51
Part types......................................................................................................................................... 52
Profiles............................................................................................................................................. 52
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 6/260
6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Changing the profile of a part .................................................................................................... 52
Standard profiles ........................................................................................................................ 53
Parametric profiles ..................................................................................................................... 53
User-defined profiles .................................................................................................................. 53
Materials........................................................................................................................................... 54
Changing the material of a part ................................................................................................. 54
Colors............................................................................................................................................... 55
User-defined attributes..................................................................................................................... 55
Part labels ........................................................................................................................................ 56
Showing part labels in a view .................................................................................................... 56
3.2 Part position.......................................................................................................................................... 57
Moving a part using handles............................................................................................................ 57
Showing part reference lines in model views................................................................................... 58
Modifying the position of a part ........................................................................................................ 58
Position on the work plane ......................................................................................................... 59
Rotation ..................................................................................................................................... 59
Position depth ............................................................................................................................ 60
Vertical position ......................................................................................................................... 61
Horizontal position ..................................................................................................................... 62
End offsets ................................................................................................................................. 63
Levels ........................................................................................................................................ 64
Bending ...................................................................................................................................... 65
3.3 Steel parts............................................................................................................................................. 66
Creating a steel column.................................................................................................................... 66
Creating a steel beam...................................................................................................................... 67
Creating a steel polybeam................................................................................................................ 67
Creating a curved beam................................................................................................................... 68
Creating a contour plate................................................................................................................... 68
Creating a round contour plate .................................................................................................. 69
Creating an orthogonal beam........................................................................................................... 69
Creating a twin profile....................................................................................................................... 70
3.4 Assemblies............................................................................................................................................ 70
Creating an assembly....................................................................................................................... 71
Creating a sub-assembly ........................................................................................................... 71
Using bolts to create assemblies ............................................................................................... 71
Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly ....................................................................... 72
Using welds to create assemblies ............................................................................................. 72
Welding sub-assemblies to an existing assembly ..................................................................... 72
Adding objects to assemblies........................................................................................................... 73
Assembly hierarchy ................................................................................................................... 73
Adding parts to an assembly ..................................................................................................... 74
Creating a nested assembly ...................................................................................................... 74
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 7/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 7
Joining assemblies .................................................................................................................... 75
Changing the assembly main part ............................................................................................. 75
Changing the main assembly .................................................................................................... 75
Removing objects from an assembly............................................................................................... 75
Highlighting objects in an assembly................................................................................................. 75
Exploding an assembly.................................................................................................................... 76
Assembly examples......................................................................................................................... 76
3.5 Concrete parts...................................................................................................................................... 77
Creating a pad footing...................................................................................................................... 78
Creating a strip footing..................................................................................................................... 78
Creating a concrete column............................................................................................................. 78
Creating a concrete beam................................................................................................................ 79
Creating a concrete polybeam......................................................................................................... 79
Creating a concrete slab.................................................................................................................. 80
Creating a round slab ................................................................................................................ 80
Creating a concrete panel................................................................................................................ 81
3.6 Cast units.............................................................................................................................................. 81
Creating a cast unit.......................................................................................................................... 82
Adding objects to cast units............................................................................................................. 82
Adding concrete objects to a cast unit ....................................................................................... 82
Adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit ............................................................................... 82
Changing the cast unit main part ............................................................................................... 82
Removing objects from a cast unit................................................................................................... 83
Highlighting objects in a cast unit..................................................................................................... 83
Exploding a cast unit........................................................................................................................ 83
Defining the cast unit type................................................................................................................ 83
Casting direction.............................................................................................................................. 84
Defining the casting direction of a part ...................................................................................... 84
Showing the top-in-form face .................................................................................................... 84
4 Detailing Structures ................................................................................ 85
4.1 Bolts...................................................................................................................................................... 85
Creating a bolt group........................................................................................................................ 86
Bolt group shape ....................................................................................................................... 86
Bolt group position ..................................................................................................................... 87
Bolt offsets ................................................................................................................................. 88
Creating a single bolt ....................................................................................................................... 88
Changing or adding bolted parts...................................................................................................... 88
4.2 Holes..................................................................................................................................................... 89
Creating round holes........................................................................................................................ 89
Creating slotted holes...................................................................................................................... 90
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 8/260
8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating oversized holes.................................................................................................................. 90
4.3 Welds.................................................................................................................................................... 91
Creating a weld between parts......................................................................................................... 91
Weld position ............................................................................................................................. 92
Weld size prefixes ...................................................................................................................... 93Creating a polygon weld................................................................................................................... 93
Creating a weld to a part .................................................................................................................. 94
Weld preparation.............................................................................................................................. 94
Manually preparing a part for welding ........................................................................................ 94
4.4 Surface treatment.................................................................................................................................. 95
Modifying surface treatment properties............................................................................................ 96
Adding surface treatment to parts.................................................................................................... 96
Adding surface treatment to a selected area ............................................................................. 97
Adding surface treatment to a part face ..................................................................................... 97Adding surface treatment to all faces of a part .......................................................................... 97
Adding surface treatment to cut faces ....................................................................................... 97
Surface treatment on chamfered parts ...................................................................................... 98
Surface treatment on parts with openings and recesses ........................................................... 98
Creating new surface treatment options........................................................................................... 99
Tiled surface treatment................................................................................................................... 100
Creating new tile patterns ........................................................................................................ 100
Example pattern definition ....................................................................................................... 101
Tile pattern definitions .............................................................................................................. 103
Tile pattern elements ............................................................................................................... 104
4.5 Fine-tuning part shape........................................................................................................................ 104
Chamfers........................................................................................................................................ 104
Chamfering part corners .......................................................................................................... 105
Corner chamfer types and dimensions .................................................................................... 105
Polybeam chamfers ................................................................................................................. 106
Chamfering part edges ............................................................................................................ 107
Fittings............................................................................................................................................ 108
Creating a fitting ....................................................................................................................... 108
Cuts................................................................................................................................................ 109
Line cuts .................................................................................................................................. 109
Polygon cuts ............................................................................................................................ 109
Part cuts ................................................................................................................................... 110
Cutting parts with a line ........................................................................................................... 111
Cutting parts with a polygon .................................................................................................... 111
Cutting parts with another part ................................................................................................. 112
Modifying the shape of a polygon................................................................................................... 112
Warping concrete parts.................................................................................................................. 113
Warping a beam using deformation angles ............................................................................. 113
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 9/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 9
Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfers ......................................................................... 113
Warping a Floor Bay (66) slab ................................................................................................. 114
Cambering parts............................................................................................................................. 115
Cambering a part ..................................................................................................................... 115
Shortening and lengthening parts.................................................................................................. 115
Shortening a part in drawings .................................................................................................. 116
Lengthening a part in drawings ............................................................................................... 116
4.6 Combining parts.................................................................................................................................. 116
Combining two parts into one......................................................................................................... 116
Attaching a part to another part...................................................................................................... 117
4.7 Splitting parts...................................................................................................................................... 117
Splitting a straight or curved part ................................................................................................... 118
Splitting a plate or slab................................................................................................................... 118
5 Examining the Model............................................................................. 119
5.1 Viewing the model.............................................................................................................................. 119
Zooming the model........................................................................................................................ 119
Modifying the zoom settings .................................................................................................... 120
Zooming with keyboard shortcuts ............................................................................................ 120
Zooming with Magnifier ........................................................................................................... 120
Rotating the model......................................................................................................................... 121
Moving the model........................................................................................................................... 122
Flying through the model................................................................................................................ 123Creating a clip plane...................................................................................................................... 124
Creating a screenshot.................................................................................................................... 124
Creating a screenshot in Windows Vista ................................................................................. 125
Saving a screenshot in bitmap format ..................................................................................... 125
Printing a screenshot ............................................................................................................... 125
5.2 Inquiring the model............................................................................................................................. 126
Inquiring object properties.............................................................................................................. 126
Object property report templates ............................................................................................. 126
Using the Custom Inquiry tool........................................................................................................ 126Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry tool ......................................................................... 127
Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool ................................................................................. 127
5.3 Showing and hiding objects................................................................................................................ 128
Defining which objects are displayed............................................................................................. 128
Representation options.................................................................................................................. 128
Hiding selected parts...................................................................................................................... 130
Hiding unselected parts.................................................................................................................. 131
Showing parts with exact lines....................................................................................................... 131
Showing and hiding assemblies..................................................................................................... 131
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 10/260
10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Showing and hiding components................................................................................................... 132
Object groups................................................................................................................................. 132
Creating an object group ......................................................................................................... 132
Copying an object group to another model .............................................................................. 133
Deleting an object group .......................................................................................................... 133
Object representation settings........................................................................................................ 133
Creating object representation settings ................................................................................... 134
Copying object representation settings to another model ........................................................ 135
Deleting object representation settings .................................................................................... 135
5.4 Visualizing project status..................................................................................................................... 135
Creating a visualization.................................................................................................................. 136
Copying visualization settings to another model............................................................................ 136
Deleting visualization settings........................................................................................................ 136
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project ................................................................ 136
Example: Defining an erection schedule ................................................................................. 137
Example: Creating object groups ............................................................................................. 137
Example: Creating object representation settings ................................................................... 138
Example: Creating visualization settings ................................................................................. 138
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule ............................................................................ 139
5.5 Checking the model............................................................................................................................ 142
Measuring objects.......................................................................................................................... 143
Measuring distances ................................................................................................................ 143
Measuring angles .................................................................................................................... 143
Measuring bolt spacing ............................................................................................................ 143
Detecting clashes........................................................................................................................... 144
Finding clashes in a model ...................................................................................................... 145
Clash Check Manager ............................................................................................................. 145
Defining a clash check clearance area for bolts ...................................................................... 148
Reverting to the old clash checking functionality ..................................................................... 149
Comparing parts or assemblies...................................................................................................... 149
Finding distant objects.................................................................................................................... 149
6 Numbering the Model ............................................................................ 1516.1 What is numbering.............................................................................................................................. 151
6.2 What affects numbering...................................................................................................................... 152
Identical parts................................................................................................................................. 152
Identical reinforcements................................................................................................................. 153
User-defined attributes in numbering............................................................................................. 153
6.3 Defining numbering series.................................................................................................................. 153
Planning your numbering series..................................................................................................... 154
Assigning a numbering series to a part.......................................................................................... 154
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 11/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 11
Family numbers.............................................................................................................................. 155
Assigning family numbers ....................................................................................................... 155
Changing the family number of an object ................................................................................ 156
Overlapping numbering series....................................................................................................... 156
6.4 Numbering objects.............................................................................................................................. 156
Numbering assemblies and cast units ........................................................................................... 157
Assembly position numbers .................................................................................................... 157
Numbering reinforcements............................................................................................................. 157
Saving preliminary numbers........................................................................................................... 158
Control numbers............................................................................................................................. 158
Assigning control numbers to parts ......................................................................................... 159
Locking and unlocking control numbers .................................................................................. 159
Changing numbers......................................................................................................................... 159
Clearing numbers........................................................................................................................... 160
Creating a standard-part model ..................................................................................................... 160
6.5 Viewing the numbering history............................................................................................................ 161
6.6 Repairing numbering errors................................................................................................................ 161
6.7 Numbering examples.......................................................................................................................... 162
Example: Numbering identical beams............................................................................................ 162
Example: Using family numbers..................................................................................................... 163
Example: Numbering selected part types...................................................................................... 164
Example: Numbering parts in selected phases.............................................................................. 164
Example: Numbering settings during a project .............................................................................. 165
7 Advanced Modeling............................................................................... 167
7.1 Organizing the model.......................................................................................................................... 167
Creating logical areas.................................................................................................................... 168
Creating object type categories...................................................................................................... 169
Modifying logical areas and object type categories........................................................................ 169
Viewing logical areas and object type categories.......................................................................... 170
Deleting logical areas and object type categories.......................................................................... 171
7.2 Phases................................................................................................................................................ 171
Dividing the model into phases...................................................................................................... 171
Custom phase properties............................................................................................................... 171
7.3 Sequences.......................................................................................................................................... 172
Creating a sequence...................................................................................................................... 172
Adding parts to a sequence........................................................................................................... 173
Checking the sequence of a part ................................................................................................... 173
Modifying the sequence number of a part...................................................................................... 173
Deleting a sequence...................................................................................................................... 173
7.4 Lotting................................................................................................................................................. 174
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 12/260
12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating a lot.................................................................................................................................. 174
Adding parts to a lot ....................................................................................................................... 175
Removing parts from a lot.............................................................................................................. 175
Deleting a lot .................................................................................................................................. 175
7.5 Parametric modeling........................................................................................................................... 176
Parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures........................................................................... 176
7.6 Sketched cross sections..................................................................................................................... 181
Opening the cross section sketch editor ........................................................................................ 181
Sketch Browser ........................................................................................................................ 182
Variables .................................................................................................................................. 183
Sketching the outline of a cross section......................................................................................... 184
Sketching a polyline ................................................................................................................. 184
Sketching an arc ...................................................................................................................... 185
Sketching a circle ..................................................................................................................... 185Refining the shape of a sketched cross section............................................................................. 186
Adding a parallel constraint ..................................................................................................... 186
Adding a perpendicular constraint ........................................................................................... 187
Adding a coincident constraint ................................................................................................. 187
Adding a fixed constraint ......................................................................................................... 188
Adding a horizontal constraint ................................................................................................. 188
Adding a vertical constraint ...................................................................................................... 189
Deleting a constraint ................................................................................................................ 189
Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section............................................................................. 190
Adding a radial dimension to a sketch ..................................................................................... 190
Adding an angle dimension to a sketch ................................................................................... 191
Adding a dimension between two points in a sketch ............................................................... 191
Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch .............................................................................. 192
Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch .................................................................................. 192
Deleting a dimension from a sketch ......................................................................................... 193
Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section............................................................... 193
Part positioning planes ............................................................................................................ 193
Connection positioning planes ................................................................................................. 194
Showing and hiding positioning planes .................................................................................... 195
Moving positioning planes ....................................................................................................... 195
Moving positioning plane handles ............................................................................................ 196
Reverting to default positioning planes .................................................................................... 197
Checking a sketched cross section................................................................................................ 197
Saving a sketched cross section.................................................................................................... 198
Modifying a sketched cross section................................................................................................ 198
Modifying chamfers in a sketch ............................................................................................... 199
Setting the sketch thickness .................................................................................................... 199
Cross section extrusion types .................................................................................................. 200
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 13/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 13
Using sketched cross sections in a model..................................................................................... 201
Creating an image of a sketched cross section ....................................................................... 201
Importing and exporting sketched cross sections.......................................................................... 202
Importing sketched cross sections .......................................................................................... 203
Exporting sketched cross sections .......................................................................................... 203
Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section............................................................... 204
Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross section ....................................................................... 204
Example: Adding dimensions to the cross section .................................................................. 205
Example: Setting the cross section thickness ......................................................................... 206
Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section ........................................................... 207
Example: Using the cross section in a model .......................................................................... 208
8 Modeling Settings.................................................................................. 211
8.1 General settings.................................................................................................................................. 211
Grid properties............................................................................................................................... 211
Grid line properties......................................................................................................................... 212
Point properties.............................................................................................................................. 212
Rotation settings............................................................................................................................ 213
Color settings................................................................................................................................. 213
Transparency settings.................................................................................................................... 214
Screenshot settings........................................................................................................................ 214
8.2 View settings....................................................................................................................................... 215
View properties.............................................................................................................................. 215Grid view properties....................................................................................................................... 215
Display settings.............................................................................................................................. 216
8.3 Part properties.................................................................................................................................... 217
Steel column properties................................................................................................................. 218
Steel beam properties.................................................................................................................... 218
Contour plate properties................................................................................................................. 219
Orthogonal beam properties.......................................................................................................... 220
Twin profile properties.................................................................................................................... 221
Pad footing properties.................................................................................................................... 222Strip footing properties................................................................................................................... 223
Concrete column properties........................................................................................................... 224
Concrete beam properties.............................................................................................................. 225
Concrete slab properties................................................................................................................ 225
Concrete panel properties.............................................................................................................. 226
8.4 Detail properties.................................................................................................................................. 227
Bolt properties................................................................................................................................ 227
Weld properties.............................................................................................................................. 229
Weld types..................................................................................................................................... 231
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 14/260
14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Corner chamfer properties............................................................................................................. 232
Edge chamfer properties................................................................................................................ 232
8.5 Numbering settings............................................................................................................................. 233
General numbering settings........................................................................................................... 233
Weld numbering settings................................................................................................................ 234Control number settings................................................................................................................. 235
9 Modeling Tips ........................................................................................ 237
9.1 General modeling tips......................................................................................................................... 237
Defining default part properties...................................................................................................... 237
Copying and moving efficiently....................................................................................................... 238
Modeling identical areas................................................................................................................. 238
Selecting values from the model.................................................................................................... 238
Activating an overlapping view....................................................................................................... 239Finding RGB values for colors........................................................................................................ 239
Right-hand rule............................................................................................................................... 239
Hiding cut lines in a view................................................................................................................ 240
Cutting efficiently............................................................................................................................ 240
Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports.................................................................................. 241
9.2 Part positioning tips............................................................................................................................. 241
Modifying part length...................................................................................................................... 241
Creating horizontal parts................................................................................................................ 242
Optional ways of placing objects in a model .................................................................................. 242Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern............................................................................ 242
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 15/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 15
Creating 3D Models
1 Creating 3D Models
This section explains how to open, create, and save models in Tekla Structures.
Contents • What is a 3D model (p. 15)
• Creating a new model (p. 16)
• Opening a model (p. 17)
• Saving a model (p. 17)
• Model templates (p. 18)
1.1 What is a 3D model
Using Tekla Structures, you can create a real-life model of any structure. The 3D modelcontains all the information that is needed to manufacture and construct the structure,including:
• Geometry and dimensions
• Profiles and cross sections
• Connection types
• Materials
The 3D model is the single source of information for drawings and other outputs, such as
reports and NC data files. This ensures that the information in drawings and reports is alwaysup to date, as they react to modifications in the model.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 16/260
16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating 3D Models
See also Creating and Modifying Structures (p. 51)
1.2 Creating a new model
You need to create a model for each Tekla Structures project. This model contains all theinformation about the project. Each model is stored in its own folder in theTeklaStructuresModels folder.
To create a new model:
1. Click File > New... or .
You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, TeklaStructures prompts you to save that model.
2. Define where to save the new model.
• To select a folder, click Browse.
• To save the model in a recently used model folder, use the Save in list box.
• To define the location manually, type the path in the Save in field, followed by the
\ character. Do not enter the model name in this field.
3. Type a unique name in the Model name field.
Do not use special characters (/ \ ; : | ).
4. Optional: In the Model template list box, select the template you want to use.
5. In the Model type list box, define whether the model may be used by one person orshared by many.
• Single-user: model will be used by one person.
• Multi-user: model is stored on a server and may be used by several people. Also
enter the name of the server in the Server field.
6. Click OK.
Tekla Structures creates the model and opens the default model view.
See also Model templates (p. 18)
Multi-user mode
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 17/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 17
Creating 3D Models
1.3 Opening a model
To open a Tekla Structures model:
1. Click File > Open... or .You can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a model open, TeklaStructures prompts you to save that model.
2. In the Open dialog box, select the model.
• To open a recently used model, use the Model name list box.
• To open a recently used model folder, use the Look in list box.
• To search for models in another folder, click Browse...
3. Click OK to open the model.
If no views are visible after you have opened a model, Tekla Structures prompts you toselect one.
See also Creating a new model (p. 16)
1.4 Saving a model
You should save your model regularly to avoid losing any work. Tekla Structures alsoautomatically saves your work at regular intervals.
To save a model, do one of the following:
• Click .
• Click File > Save.
See also Saving a model with a different name or location (p. 17)
Saving in multi-user mode
Autosave
Saving a model with a different name or location
To save a copy of a model under a different name or in a different location:
1. Click File > Save As...
2. In the Save as dialog box, browse to the folder where you want to save the model.
You can sort models by clicking the column titles.
When the models are sorted alphabetically by their names, you can usethe keyboard to select models. For example, when you type N, TeklaStructures selects the first model starting with an N.
The Autosave tool automatically saves your model and drawings at setintervals. To set the autosave interval, click Tools > Options >
Options... > General.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 18/260
18 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating 3D Models
3. In the Model name field, type a new name.
4. Click OK.
Tekla Structures creates a new copy with a different name, but the original version of themodel remains intact.
See also Saving a model (p. 17)
1.5 Model templates
You can save the desired settings in a model and use that model as a template when you createnew models.
The location of model templates is defined by the advanced optionXS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY. For example, you can set this advanced optionto point to the same location as XS_FIRM. By default, the advanced option points to the folder..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\default\model_templates\ .
Any model under the defined folder will be available as a model template if the fileTeklaStructuresModel.xml in the model folder contains the setting<IsTemplate>TRUE</IsTemplate>. The default value is FALSE.
You can create only single-user models with model templates. If you wish to create a multi-usermodel using a model template, create the model in single-user mode and then switch to multi-user mode.
See also Creating a model template (p. 18)
Switching between single-user and multi-user modes
Creating a model template
When you create a model template, always start by creating a new empty model. This isbecause old models cannot be completely cleaned and they might contain quite a lot of information even if you delete all objects from the model.
To create a model template:
1. Create a new model and give it a unique name.
For example, Steel framework.
2. Add the desired profiles, custom components, and so on, in the model.
3. Save and close the model.
4. Move the whole model folder in the location pointed by the advanced optionXS_MODEL_TEMPLATE_DIRECTORY.
By default, the advanced option points to the folder ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\default\model_templates\ .
5. In the new template model folder, open the TeklaStructuresModel.xml fileusing any standard text editor.
This section is for advanced users.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 19/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 19
Creating 3D Models
6. Set the IsTemplate element to TRUE.
7. Save the file.
See also Model templates (p. 18)
Do not edit the TeklaStructuresModels.xml file that is locatedin the TeklaStructuresModels folder or in the place pointed bythe advanced option XS_RUNPATH.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 20/260
20 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating 3D Models
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 21/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 21
Setting up the Workspace
2 Setting up the Workspace
This section explains how to set up the workspace so that you can start modeling. It alsopresents some basic Tekla Structures vocabulary and concepts that are needed when workingwith 3D models.
Contents • Screen layout (p. 21)
• Work area (p. 25)
• Work plane (p. 27)
• Coordinate system (p. 28)
• Grids (p. 29)
• Views (p. 33)
• Construction objects (p. 40)
• Points (p. 42)
• Reference models (p. 43)
2.1 Screen layout
When you start Tekla Structures, a new window appears on the screen. Initially, most of themenu options and all the icons are gray indicating that they are inactive. When you open or
create a model, the icons and available menu options will become active.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 22/260
22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
The following illustration identifies the various areas of the Tekla Structures modelinginterface:
See also Changing the background color (p. 23)
Status bar displays instructions, and the status of some settings
Snap settings control which points you can snap to and pick
Select switches determine the selectable objects
Pull-down menus contain all the commands
Toolbars can be either docked or floating
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 23/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 23
Setting up the Workspace
Changing the background color
You can define the background color of model views using RGB values. You can control thecolor of each corner of the background separately.
To change the background color in rendered views:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.2. Modify the background color using the following advanced options:
• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1
• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2
• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR3
• XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR4
To use a single-colored background, set the same value for all four corners of thebackground. To use the default background color, leave the advanced option fieldsempty.
3. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect.
See also Finding RGB values for colors (p. 239)Background color examples (p. 23)
Background color examples
Below are some examples of possible background colors that you can define. The first RGBvalue refers to the advanced option XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR1, the second value to theadvanced option XS_BACKGROUND_COLOR2, and so on.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 24/260
24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
RGB values Result
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0
0.0 0.4 0.2
0.0 0.4 0.2
0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 25/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 25
Setting up the Workspace
See also Changing the background color (p. 23)
Finding RGB values for colors (p. 239)
2.2 Work area
Tekla Structures indicates the work area of a view using green, dashed lines.
0.3 0.0 0.6
0.3 0.0 0.6
1.0 1.0 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0
0.0 0.2 0.7
0.0 0.8 0.7
0.0 0.2 0.7
0.0 0.8 0.7
RGB values Result
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 26/260
26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
You can define the work area to suit particular situations, for example, to concentrate on aparticular area of the model. Defining the work area makes it faster and easier to work with themodel. Objects outside the work area still exist, but they are not visible.
See also Defining the work area (p. 26)
Hiding the work area (p. 26)
Defining the work area
You can shrink and expand the work area by picking the corner points of the new work area, orsize the work area to include selected parts, or all model objects. You can define the work areain a selected view, or in all visible views.
To define the work area:
1. Select a command from View > Fit Work Area.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
2. Define the work area by following the instructions on the status bar.
See also Work area (p. 25)
Hiding the work area
If you want, you can hide the green work area box. This can be useful, for example, whencreating screenshots for presentations.
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.
2. Set the XS_HIDE_WORKAREA advanced option to TRUE.
3. Click OK or Apply.
4. Click View > Redraw All. Tekla Structures hides the work area.
5. To make the work area visible again, set the advanced option to FALSE.
See also Work area (p. 25)
Alternatively, hold down the Ctrl and Shift keys when clicking View >
Redraw All to hide the green work area box. To make the box visibleagain, click View > Redraw All again.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 27/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 27
Setting up the Workspace
2.3 Work plane
The red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is the local coordinate systemof the model. The work plane also has its own grid, which can be used for positioning parts.Tekla Structures displays the work plane grid in dark red color.
To display the work plane grid, select Work plane from the second list box on the Snapping toolbar.
The red arrow symbol shows the xy plane. The z direction follows the right-hand rule.
Most of the commands that are dependent on the coordinate system use work planecoordinates. For example creating points, part positioning, and copying always comply with thework plane coordinate system. The current work plane is model-specific, so it is the same in allviews.
See also Shifting the work plane (p. 27)
Restoring the default work plane (p. 28)
Changing the color of the work plane grid (p. 28)Right-hand rule (p. 239)
Shifting the work plane
You can shift the work plane to any position by picking points, parallel to one of the globalbasic planes, or on a part or view plane. When modeling sloped parts, shifting the work planehelps you to place parts accurately. For example, to model horizontal bracing and purlins in asloped roof, you need to shift the work plane to the slope of the roof.
To shift the work plane:
1. Click View > Set Work Plane and select one of the commands.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
2. Shift the work plane by following the instructions on the status bar.
3. Optional: In the second list box on the Snapping toolbar, select Work plane to displaythe work plane grid.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 28/260
28 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
See also Work plane (p. 27)
Restor ing the default work plane
Remember to change back to the default work plane when you have finished modeling slopedstructures.
To restore the default work plane:
1. Click View > Set Work Plane > Parallel to XY(Z) Plane...
2. Set Plane to XY.
3. Set Depth coordinate to 0.
4. Click Change.
See also Work plane (p. 27)
Changing the color of the work plane grid
To change the color of the work plane grid:
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.
2. Modify the advanced option XS_GRID_COLOR_FOR_WORK_PLANE.
Define the color using RGB values on a scale of 0 to 1. For example, to change the colorto red, set the value to 1.0 0.0 0.0.
3. Click OK.
4. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect.
See also Work plane (p. 27)
Finding RGB values for colors (p. 239)
2.4 Coordinate system
The symbol with three axes (x, y, and z) represents the local coordinate system and indicatesthe direction of the model. It is located in the lower right corner of the model view. Thecoordinate symbol follows the work plane.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 29/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 29
Setting up the Workspace
In wire frame views, the green cube represents the global coordinate system and lies at theglobal point of origin.
See also Work plane (p. 27)
View types (p. 36)
2.5 Grids
Grids are used as an aid in locating objects in a Tekla Structures model. A grid represents athree-dimensional complex of horizontal and vertical planes. The grid is shown on the viewplane using dash-and-dot lines.
You can make grids and grid lines act magnetically so that the objects on the grid lines follow if
you move the grid line.
Grid origin is the point where the zero points of each coordinate axisintersect
Grid line extensions define how far the grid lines extend in each direction
Grid labels are the names of the grid lines shown in views
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 30/260
30 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
You can have more than one grid in a model. So that you can easily locate objects in yourmodel, we strongly advise that you create a modular grid. You can create a large-scale grid forthe entire structure, and smaller grids for some detailed sections. You can also create single gridlines and attach them to an existing grid.
See also Creating a grid (p. 30)
Modifying a grid (p. 31)Deleting a grid (p. 31)
Changing the grid color (p. 31)
Grid lines (p. 32)
Creating a grid
When you create a new model, Tekla Structures automatically creates a grid and a viewaccording to the saved standard properties. You can also create grids manually.
To manually create a grid:
1. Click Modeling > Create Grid...2. Modify the grid properties.
3. Optional: To bind objects to the grid lines, select the Magnetic grid plane check box.
4. Optional: When prompted, pick a point to indicate the origin of the grid.
The coordinates of the picked point appear in the Grid dialog box as X0, Y0, and Z0.
If you do not pick a point, Tekla Structures positions the origin according to the valuesyou entered for X0, Y0, and Z0.
5. Click Create.
See also Grids (p. 29)
Grid coordinates (p. 30)
Grid labels (p. 31)Grid properties (p. 211)
Grid coordinatesThe x and y coordinates of a grid are relative. This means that the entries for x and y are alwaysrelative to the previous entry. The z coordinates are absolute, which means that entries for z areabsolute distances from the work plane origin.
There are two ways to enter the x or y coordinates of grid lines:
• Define the coordinates individually. For example, 0 4000 4000.
• Define several grid lines with equal spacing. For example, 0 2*4000.
Both methods create three lines with the spacing of 4000.
See also Creating a grid (p. 30)
Coordinate system (p. 28)
Use a zero at the start to represent a grid on the 0,0 coordinate and spacesas separators for coordinates. You can have a maximum of 1024characters in the coordinates field.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 31/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 31
Setting up the Workspace
Grid labelsLabels are the names of the grid lines shown in views. The names in the X field are associatedwith the grid lines parallel to the y axis and vice versa. The Z field is for the names of levelsparallel to the work plane. If you wish, you can leave the label fields empty.
See also Grids (p. 29)
Creating a grid (p. 30)
Modifying a grid
To modify a grid:
1. Ensure that the Select grid selection switch is selected.
2. Double-click a grid line. The Grid dialog box appears.
3. Modify the grid properties.
4. Click Modify to save the changes.
See also Grids (p. 29)
Grid properties (p. 211)
Deleting a grid
To delete a grid:
1. Ensure that the Select grid selection switch is selected.
2. Select a grid line.
3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
See also Grids (p. 29)
Changing the grid color
To change the color of the grid in rendered views:
When working with very large grids, always having the grid labelsvisible might slow down Tekla Structures. To hide the grid labels whenyou zoom in, use the advanced option XS_ADJUST_GRID_LABELS.
If you have attached additional grid lines to the grid and you want topreserve them, clear the check boxes next to the coordinate fields in theGrid dialog box.
If the coordinate check boxes are selected, Tekla Structures deletes allsingle grid lines attached to the grid.
When you delete a grid, ensure that you do not have any other objectsselected. If you have also other objects selected, Tekla Structures onlydeletes the objects, not the grid.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 32/260
32 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
1. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.
2. Modify the advanced option XS_GRID_COLOR.
Define the color using RGB values on a scale of 0 to 1. For example, to change the colorto red, set the value to 1.0 0.0 0.0.
3. Click OK.
4. Close and reopen the view for the change to take effect.
See also Grids (p. 29)
Finding RGB values for colors (p. 239)
Grid lines
You can attach single grid lines to an existing grid.
Single grid lines have handles. When you select a grid line, the handles appear in magenta. Youcan use handles to move the grid lines.
See also Grids (p. 29)
Creating a single grid line (p. 32)
Modifying a single grid line (p. 33)
Deleting a single grid line (p. 33)
Moving a part using handles (p. 57)
Creating a single grid lineTo create a single grid line:
1. Click Modeling > Add Grid Line.
2. Select an existing grid to attach the grid line to.
3. Pick the starting point of the grid line.
4. Pick the end point of the grid line.
If you want to move the grid lines using the handles to make a skewedgrid, you can do this only on the local XY plane of the grid.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 33/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 33
Setting up the Workspace
See also Grid lines (p. 32)
Modifying a single grid lineTo modify a single grid line:
1. Ensure that the Select grid line selection switch is selected.2. Double-click a grid line. The Grid Line Properties dialog box appears.
3. Modify the grid line properties.
4. Click Modify to save the changes.
See also Grid lines (p. 32)
Grid line properties (p. 212)
Deleting a single grid l ineTo delete a single grid line:
1. Ensure that the Select grid line selection switch is selected.2. Select the grid line you want to delete.
3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
See also Grid lines (p. 32)
2.6 Views
A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in itsown window inside the Tekla Structures window.
There are several ways to create views in Tekla Structures. For example, you can create views:
• of the entire structure
• of selected parts and components
• of selected cast units and assemblies
•along the grid lines
When you delete a grid line, ensure that you do not have any otherobjects selected. If you also have other objects selected, Tekla Structuresonly deletes the objects, not the grid line.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 34/260
34 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
See also Creating a view (p. 35)
Opening a view (p. 38)
Modifying a view (p. 38)
Deleting a view (p. 38)
Switching between open views (p. 39)
Switching between 3D and plane view (p. 39)
Refreshing views (p. 39)
Arranging views (p. 39)
Should I model in a 3D or plane view?
3D, plane, and elevation views provide different types of information, which is useful fordifferent tasks.
One common technique is to open several views:
• A 3D view to see a real-life version of the model
• A plane view, where you can add and connect parts
• An elevation view to check the level
Selecting a part in a view highlights the part in all open views.
When you need to see a specific part clearly, create a 3D view of thepart. This places the part in the center of the view.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 35/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 35
Setting up the Workspace
See also Views (p. 33)
Switching between 3D and plane view (p. 39)
Creating a view
To create a new view:
1. Select a view command from the View menu.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
2. Create the view by following the instructions on the status bar.
3. Optional: Save the view.
a Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.
b Type a unique name in the Name field.
c Click Modify.
See also Views (p. 33)
View settings (p. 215)
About naming views (p. 35)
View types (p. 36)
View planes (p. 36)
Creating grid views (p. 38)
About naming viewsTekla Structures numbers views in order of creation, so you do not have to give each view aspecific name.
You should give each view a unique name if you need to open it in later sessions. When you
exit the model, Tekla Structures only saves the named views. Temporary views, which have adefault name in parentheses, disappear when you close them.
See also Creating a view (p. 35)
If you are working with two screens, maximize your work area byputting the elevation and 3D views on one screen and the plane view onthe other.
Temporary views have a default name in parentheses. Do not useparentheses when naming a view, or the view will not be saved for lateruse.
In multi-user mode, it is very important to give views unique names. If several users have different views with the same name, the view settingsof one user may randomly override the settings of another user.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 36/260
36 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
View typesThe view type defines the appearance of the view. It also affects what methods you can use torotate the model. The view type options are:
• Rendered
Objects look more realistic because they are non-transparent and their surfaces are
displayed.• Wire frame
Objects are transparent and their outlines are displayed. You cannot rotate the model withthe mouse in wire frame views.
See also Creating a view (p. 35)
Representation options (p. 128)
View planesEach view has a view plane on which the grids are visible and points are represented as yellowcrosses. Points that are located outside the view plane are red.
Basic views Basic views are those parallel to the global basic planes (xy, xz, and zy). In basic views, twoaxes always define the view plane and the axes appear in the plane name. The third axis isperpendicular to the view plane. It does not appear in the plane name. In the basic plane view,the model is shown from the direction of the third axis.
The view plane options for basic views are:
Plane: XY
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 37/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 37
Setting up the Workspace
For basic views, you also define the distance the view plane is from the global origin in thedirection of the third axis. The view plane coordinate equals this distance.
Other views For view types other than basic views, you either define the view plane and coordinate bypicking points, or the points are defined automatically, depending on the creation method.
See also Moving a view plane (p. 37)
Creating a view (p. 35)
Moving a view planeYou can change the view plane by moving it like any other object. When you move a viewplane, Tekla Structures only uses the vector that is perpendicular to the view plane.
To move the view plane:
1. Click the view.
2. Right-click and select Move Special > Linear... from the pop-up menu.
3. Pick the starting point of the translation vector, or enter its coordinates.
4. Pick the end point of the translation vector, or enter its coordinates.
5. Click Move.
See also View planes (p. 36)
Plane: XZ
Plane: ZY
If the Move - Linear dialog box is open but the command is not activeanymore, click the Pick button to re-activate the command.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 38/260
38 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
Creating grid viewsGrid views are views along the grid lines. You can define how many views Tekla Structureswill create, how it will name the views, and which view properties it will use.
Before you start, create a view that contains a grid.
To create grid views:
1. Select the grid.
2. Click View > Create View of Model > Along Grid Lines...
3. Modify the grid properties.
4. Click Create. The Views dialog box appears.
5. Click the arrow buttons to show or hide the grid views.
The grid views will not be visible until you move them to the visible views in the Views dialog box.
See also Creating a view (p. 35)
Grid view properties (p. 215)
Opening a viewTo view and open an existing view:
1. Click View > View List....
The Views dialog box appears. Tekla Structures lists all invisible named views on theleft, and all visible views on the right.
2. Select a view and use the arrows between the lists, or double-click a view to open it.
See also Views (p. 33)
Modifying a viewTo modify an existing view:
1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Modify the view properties.
3. Click Modify.
See also Views (p. 33)
View settings (p. 215)
Deleting a view
To delete a named view:
You can have up to nine views on the screen at the same time. If you tryto open more than nine views, Tekla Structures displays a warning. If theview does not appear, check how many views you have open.
To open multiple views, use the Shift and Ctrl keys when you selectviews from the list.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 39/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 39
Setting up the Workspace
1. Click View > View List....
The Views dialog box appears. Tekla Structures lists all invisible named views on theleft, and all visible views on the right.
2. Select the view you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
See also Views (p. 33)
Switching between open views
To switch between open views, do one of the following:
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Tab.• On the Window menu, select a view from the list.
See also Views (p. 33)
Switching between 3D and plane view (p. 39)
Switching between 3D and plane view
To switch between the 3D and the plane view, do one of the following:
• Press Ctrl+P.
• Click View > Switch to 3D / Plane.
• In the View Properties dialog box, select an option from the Angle list box, and thenclick Modify.
See also Views (p. 33)
Switching between open views (p. 39)
Refreshing views
To refresh the screen display, do any of the following:
See also Views (p. 33)
Arranging views
You can arrange views manually by dragging and dropping each view within the Tekla
Structures window, or have Tekla Structures automatically arrange views.
To delete multiple views, use the Shift and Ctrl keys when you selectviews from the list.
To Do thisRedraw the contents of the activeview
Right-click the view and select Redraw View fromthe pop-up menu.
Redraw the contents of all theviews
Click View > Redraw All.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 40/260
40 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
To arrange the views, do any of the following:
See also Views (p. 33)
2.7 Construct ion objects
Construction planes, lines, and circles help you place other objects. For example, you can
easily pick the points at intersections of construction lines and circles. The snap priority of construction objects is the same as with the other lines.
Construction objects remain in the model when you update or redraw views and windows.They do not appear in drawings.
You can also create magnetic construction lines or planes to bind and move groups of objects.For example, rather than binding lots of handles and chamfers to faces, simply create aconstruction plane that goes through all the handles and chamfers. Then make this planemagnetic and bind the plane to the appropriate face. When you move the plane, the attachedhandles and chamfers move with it.
See also Creating a construction plane (p. 40)
Creating a construction line (p. 41)
Creating a construction circle (p. 41)
Creating a construction plane
To create a construction plane:
1. Click Modeling > Add Construction Plane.
2. Pick four points.
3. Click the middle mouse button. Tekla Structures draws the plane.
4. Double-click the plane in the model. The Construction Plane Properties dialog boxappears.
5. Type a name for the plane.6. Optional: To make the construction plane magnetic, select the Magnetic check box.
To Do this
Arrange all open views in astack
Click Windows > Cascade.
Arrange all open viewshorizontally
Click Windows > Tile Horizontally.
Arrange all open viewsvertically
Click Windows > Tile Vertically.
Close all the views Click View > Close All.
You cannot use the Cascade, Tile Horizontally, and Tile Vertically commands for views that you can move outside the Tekla Structureswindow.
For more information on how to move part and component basic viewsand zoom windows across the entire Windows desktop, seeXS_MDIVIEWPARENT, XS_MDIZOOMPARENT, andXS_MDIBASICVIEWPARENT.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 41/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 41
Setting up the Workspace
7. Click Modify.
See also Construction objects (p. 40)
Creating a construction line
To create a construction line:
1. Click Modeling > Add Construction Line.2. Pick the starting point of the construction line.
3. Pick the end point of the construction line.
4. Optional: Make the construction line magnetic.
a Double-click the line in the model.
b Select the Magnetic check box.
c Click Modify.
See also Construction objects (p. 40)
Creating a construction circle
To create a construction circle:
1. Select a command from Modeling > Add Construction Circle.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
2. Create the construction circle by following the instructions on the status bar.
See also Construction objects (p. 40)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 42/260
42 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
2.8 Points
You can create points to make it easier to place objects at positions where no lines or objectsintersect.
There are many ways to create points in Tekla Structures. Which method is the most convenientat each time depends on what you have already created in the model and which locations youcan easily pick.
When you create points, Tekla Structures always places them according to the work planecoordinate system. Points located on the view plane are yellow and points outside the viewplane are red.
See also Creating a point (p. 42)
Importing points (p. 42)
Point properties (p. 212)
Creating a point
To create a point:
1. Use the icons on the Points toolbar, or select a command from Modeling > Add Points.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
2. Create the point by following the instructions on the status bar.
See also Points (p. 42)
Importing points
You can import points to specific locations in an open Tekla Structures model using the pointcreation import macro. You need to specify the point coordinates in a text file. In some casesthis file is generated by another software package.
To import points from a file:
1. Create a point import file.
This section is for advanced users.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 43/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 43
Setting up the Workspace
a Create a text file that consists of single lines for each point.
Use commas or tabs as delimiters for the three point coordinates on a line. Forexample:
100,500,1000
300,700,1500
b Save the file.2. Press Ctrl + F to open the Component Catalog.
3. Type point in the Search field and click Search.
4. Double-click Point Creation Import (8).
5. Type the ASCII file name.
Include the full path and the file extension. If you do not specify the path, TeklaStructures looks for the file in the current model folder.
6. Define the origin of the imported points by entering the coordinates.
7. Click Create.
See also Points (p. 42)
2.9 Reference models
A reference model is a file which helps you to build a Tekla Structures model. A reference
model is created in Tekla Structures or another software or modeling tool and imported to TeklaStructures.
For example, an architectural model, a plant design model, or a heating, ventilating and air-conditioning (HVAC) model can be used as a reference model. Reference models can also besimple 2D drawings that are imported and then used as a layout to directly build the model on.
The following file types are supported:
• AutoCAD (*.dxf)
• AutoCAD (*.dwg)
• MicroStation (*.dgn, *.prp)
• Cadmatic models (*.3dd)
• IFC files (*.IFC)
• IGES files (*.igs, *.iges)
• Tekla WebViewer XML files (*.xml)
You can snap to reference model geometry. Tekla Structures loads the reference model from thefile each time you open your model. It does not save the reference model when you save thecurrent model. The filename extension of a saved reference model properties file is *.rop.
See also Inserting a reference model (p. 44)
Modifying reference model properties (p. 44)
Selecting a reference model (p. 45)
Hiding a reference model (p. 45)
Highlighting a reference model (p. 45)
During the import process, Tekla Structures ignores all lines in the
import file which do not consist of valid values delimited by tabs orcommas.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 44/260
44 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
Updating reference models (p. 45)
Detecting changes in a reference model (p. 45)
Viewing reference model layers (p. 46)
Reference model objects (p. 47)
Supported DGN objects (p. 48)
Inserting a reference model
To insert a reference model in a Tekla Structures model:
1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. Check the work plane position, as it determines the rotation of the reference model in theTekla Structures model.
3. Click File > Insert Reference Model...
4. Click the Browse... button to browse for the reference model file.
5. Set the scale of the reference model, if it is different to the one in the Tekla Structuresmodel (for example, if it uses different measurement units).
6. Click Apply or OK to save the current reference model properties.
7. Pick a position to define the reference model origin.
Tekla Structures displays the reference model origin as a handle.
See also Reference models (p. 43)
Modifying reference model properties
To modify the properties of a reference model:
1. Click File > Reference Model List...
2. Double-click the reference model to open the Reference Model Properties dialog box.
3. Click User-defined attributes.
4. Modify the properties and then click Modify.
See also Reference models (p. 43)
If you do not define a reference model file to use, the file does not exist,or you forget to click Apply, Tekla Structures displays a defaultreference model. The default reference model is a white cross:
You can define user-defined attributes in the objects.inp file. Formore information on user-defined attributes, see Adding properties.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 45/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 45
Setting up the Workspace
Selecting a reference model
To select a reference model:
1. Activate the Select component switch.
2. Select the reference model.
See also Reference models (p. 43)
Selecting a reference model object (p. 48)
Hiding a reference model
To hide a reference model:
1. Click File > Reference Model List...
2. Select Hidden from the Visibility list box.
See also Reference models (p. 43)
Highlighting a reference model
To check which reference models are included in the model, you can highlight them.
To highlight a reference model:
1. Click File > Reference Model List...
2. Select a reference model from the list.
The reference model is highlighted in the Tekla Structures model.
See also Reference models (p. 43)
Updating reference models
You can update the reference models in your Tekla Structures model in case there have beenchanges in the original reference models after you have brought them into Tekla Structures.
To update all reference models:
1. Click File > Reference Model List...
2. Click Reload all.
Tekla Structures goes through all the reference models and regenerates the cache for thereference models that have a newer modified date than the one already in the cache.
See also Reference models (p. 43)
Detecting changes in a reference model
Reference models are often updated, but the changes are rarely documented. You can see thechanges between an old and a new reference model in Tekla Structures by using the commandsin the Reference Model Properties dialog box.
You can detect changes in reference models that are of the following file formats:
• IFC (.ifc)
• Cadmatic (.3dd)
• WebViewer (.xml)
• 3D DWG (.dwg)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 46/260
46 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
To view changes in a reference model:
1. Double-click the reference model.
2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, browse for the name of the old file byclicking the Browse... button next to the Old file name field.
3. Select an option in the Show list box in the Change detection section.
For example, select Inserted to see the added objects.
4. Click Display. Tekla Structures highlights the inserted reference model objects.
See also Reference models (p. 43)
Viewing reference model layers
You can view different layers of a reference model. This is useful if you want to for exampleexamine only certain parts of the model.
To view reference model layers:
1. Double-click the reference model.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 47/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 47
Setting up the Workspace
2. In the Reference Model Properties dialog box, click Select layers...
3. Select the layers you want to view. Depending on your reference model, you could forexample select a layer that contains only windows.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Modify in the Reference Model Properties dialog box. Tekla Structureshighlights the layer with windows.
See also Reference models (p. 43)
Reference model objects
You can split reference models into separate reference model objects . Reference modelobjects can have separate user-defined attributes that can be used for reports and the view and
selection filters.
The reference model objects are read-only.
Limitations The use of this functionality depends on the file format and file structure. You can use it forexample for IFC and for DWG files that include any of the following objects:
• block table
• polyface mesh
• polygon mesh
• proxy object (for example, ADT)
• ACIS objects (3DSolid, Body, Region)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 48/260
48 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
See also Reference models (p. 43)
Selecting a reference model object (p. 48)
Splitting a reference model into reference model objects (p. 48)
Selecting a reference model objectTo select a reference model object:
1. Activate the Select objects in components switch.
2. Select the desired object in the reference model.
See also Reference model objects (p. 47)
Selecting a reference model (p. 45)
Splitt ing a reference model into reference model objectsYou can quickly split reference models into reference model objects. After you have split thereference model into reference model objects, you can use the ID number and attributes of thereference model objects for example in filtering and reports.
To split a reference model into reference model objects:
1. Select the reference model and double-click it to display the Reference Model
Properties dialog box.
2. Click Subdivide.
See also Reference model objects (p. 47)
Filtering reference model object properties
Supported DGN objects
Tekla Structures can display the following DGN objects in reference models:
• Line Elements (Type 3)
• Line String (Type 4)
• Shape (Type 6)
• Text Nodes (Type 7)
You cannot use this functionality for DGN, STEP, or IGES files.
The advanced optionXS_USE_EXACT_EXTREMA_FOR_REFERENCE_MODELS isnot compatible with this feature.
When you have split the reference model into reference model objects,the ID numbers of all the reference model objects are visible in themodel database, even if you remove the reference model object andupdate the reference model.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 49/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 49
Setting up the Workspace
• Curve (Type 11)
• Complex Chains (Type 12)
• Complex Shapes (Type 14)
• Elliptic Elements (Type 15)
• Arc Elements (Type 16)
• Text Elements (Type 17)
• Surfaces (Type 18)
• Solids (Type 19)
• Point String Elements (Type 22)
• Cone Elements (Type 23)
• B-spline Surfaces (Type 24)
• B-spline Curves (Type 27)
• Shared Cells (Type 34, 35)
• Mesh Elements (Type 105), subtype "Indexed Face Loops"
See also Reference models (p. 43)
The following DGN objects are not supported:
• Dimension Elements (Type 33)
• Multiline Elements (Type 36)
• Mesh Elements (Type 105), other subtypes than "Indexed Face
Loops"
SmartSolid elements are supported as WireFrame only.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 50/260
50 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Setting up the Workspace
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 51/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 51
Creating and Modifying Structures
3 Creating and ModifyingStructures
This section explains how to create and modify parts using different materials and profiles. Italso includes a general description of part properties and step-by-step instructions for all thepart commands.
Contents • Parts (p. 51)
• Part position (p. 57)
• Steel parts (p. 66)
• Assemblies (p. 70)
• Concrete parts (p. 77)
• Cast units (p. 81)
3.1 Parts
In Tekla Structures, the term part refers to the basic building objects that can be modeled anddetailed further. These are the building blocks of the physical model.
Every part has properties that define it, such as material, profile, and location. You can use partproperties in view and selection filters. For example, you can select, modify, and hide partsbased on their properties. You can also include part properties and user-defined attributes indrawing and report templates.
See also Part properties (p. 217)
Part types (p. 52)
Profiles (p. 52)
Materials (p. 54)
Colors (p. 55)
User-defined attributes (p. 55)
Part labels (p. 56)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 52/260
52 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
Part types
The main steel parts are:
• column
• beam
• polybeam
• curved beam
• contour plate
The main concrete parts are:
• pad footing
• strip footing
• column
• beam
• polybeam
• slab
• panel
See also Parts (p. 51)
Steel parts (p. 66)
Concrete parts (p. 77)
Profiles
Tekla Structures contains standard, parametric, and user-defined profiles.
When you create or modify a part, you can select the profile from a tree that contains all the
profiles available in the profile catalog. The profiles are grouped according to rules that you candefine and modify.
For user-defined profiles Tekla Structures also displays cross section information.
See also Changing the profile of a part (p. 52)
Standard profiles (p. 53)
Parametric profiles (p. 53)
User-defined profiles (p. 53)
The profile catalog
Changing the profi le of a partTo change the profile of a part:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.
• For steel parts, click the Select... button next to the Profile field.
Icon Description
A standard profile.
A parametric profile.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 53/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 53
Creating and Modifying Structures
• For concrete parts, click the button next to the Shape field.
By default, only the profile types that are relevant to the material of the part are shown.
3. Optional: Define what profile information you want to see.
• To display all the profiles of the profile catalog in the tree, select the Show all
profiles check box.
• To see all the properties of profiles, select the Show details check box.
4. Select a profile from the list.
• To select a recently used profile, use the Profile name list box.
• If you select a parametric profile, enter the profile dimensions in the Value column.
5. Click Apply or OK.
6. Click Modify.
See also Profiles (p. 52)
Standard profilesWhen you first start Tekla Structures, the profile catalog contains standard, environment-specific profiles.
The properties of these library profiles conform to industry standards, so you should not editthem. You can add profiles to the profile catalog.
See also Profiles (p. 52)
Parametric profilesYou can use parametric profiles to model profiles that are standard in a specific environment,but do not exist in the Tekla Structures profile catalog. Parametric profiles are partly user-definable and they have a predefined shape, but you determine their size by giving one or moreparameters.
Parametric profile names have specific prefixes and they include dimension values. Dimensionvalues in parametric profile names are separated by the standard separators -, X, /, and *.
You can define alternative prefixes for parametric profiles. You can also define additionalseparators using the variables XS_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATOR andXS_USER_DEFINED_PARAMETRIC_PROFILE_SEPARATORS .
See also Profiles (p. 52)
User-defined profi lesYou can create your own profiles and save them in the profile catalog. For example, you couldcreate a pitched user-defined profile, with different cross sections at the beginning and end of the profile.
See also Profiles (p. 52)
Sketched cross sections (p. 181)
Adding a standard (fixed) user-defined profile
You can also enter a profile name in the Profile field in the partproperties dialog box.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 54/260
54 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
Materials
When you create or modify a part, you can select the material and grade from a tree thatcontains all the materials available in the material catalog.
Each material has the following properties:
See also Changing the material of a part (p. 54)
The material catalog
Changing the material of a part
To change the material of a part:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Click Select... next to the Material field.
The Select Material dialog box appears.
3. Optional: Define what material information you want to see.
• To include aliases for material grades in the tree, select the Show aliases check
box.
• To see all the properties of materials, select the Show details check box.
4. Select a material from the list.
5. Click Apply or OK.
6. Click Modify.
See also Materials (p. 54)
Property Description
Alias Aliases are alternative names. For example, they can beformer names, or names used in different countries orstandards.
Tekla Structures automatically translates aliases into thestandard name when you select a material grade.
Analysis information The Analysis tab contains information about the propertiesused in structural analysis, including the modulus of elasticity, Poisson’s ratio, and thermal dilatation coefficient.
Design information The Design tab contains information about design-specific
properties, such as strengths, partial safety factors, and so on.
User attributes Use the User attributes tab to view or modify the user-defined properties of materials.
For example, this tab could contain the maximum grain size,porosity, or surface quality class of a concrete material type,or country-specific properties.
You can also enter a material name in the Material field in the partproperties dialog box.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 55/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 55
Creating and Modifying Structures
Colors
You can change the color of some model objects by modifying their class in the part propertiesdialog box. You can also use the object representation settings to specify colors for definedobject groups.
See also Object representation settings (p. 133)
User-defined attributes
User-defined attributes provide extra information about a part. Attributes can consist of numbers, text, or lists. The following table gives some examples of what you can use attributesfor:
Class Color
black
1 light gray or white
2 or 0 red
3 bright green
4 blue
5 cyan
6 yellow
7 magenta
8 gray
9 pink
10 lime
11 aqua
12 lilac
13 orange
14 light blue
Attribute Can be used...
Comment In part and weld marks in Tekla Structures drawings, or inprojects.
Shorten When drawings of the parts are created, Tekla Structuresdecreases the true length of the part by this value. This isuseful when creating assembly drawings of bracing bars thatshould always be under tension.
Camber In part marks in Tekla Structures drawings.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 56/260
56 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Part properties (p. 217)
Adding properties
Part labelsYou can display selected part properties, user-defined attributes, and template attributes in amodel view by using part labels .
See also Part properties (p. 217)
Showing part labels in a view (p. 56)
Showing part labels in a viewTo show part labels in a view:
1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Click Display...
3. In the Display dialog box, go to the Advanced tab.
4. Select the Part label check box.
Preliminary mark To obtain preliminary marks for parts in reports.
Locked To protect objects from being accidentally changed.
Shear, Tension, and
Moment
To save reaction forces for AutoDefaults. You can enterforces separately for each end of a part.
User field 1...4 User-defined fields. You can change the names of these fieldsand add new user-defined fields.
Connection code When importing information on connection types into TeklaStructures. You can then use the connection codes as rules inAutoConnection and AutoDefaults. Each end of a part canhave a different connection code.
Attribute Can be used...
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 57/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 57
Creating and Modifying Structures
5. Define which part properties to display in part labels.
a Select a property in the Properties list.
b Click Add to add the property to the Part label list.
6. Optional: Define which user-defined attribute or template attribute to display in partlabels.
a Select User-defined attribute in the Properties list.
b Click Add. The Part label dialog box appears.
c Enter the attribute name and click OK.
7. Click Modify.
See also Part labels (p. 56)
3.2 Part position
When you create a part, you position it by picking points. The points form the part reference
line . You can use part reference lines to help snap to the middle points of parts, for example.Tekla Structures indicates the direction of a part with handles . When you select a part, TeklaStructures highlights the handles. The handle of the first end point is yellow, the rest aremagenta.
The handles also symbolize the part reference points . The position of a part is always relativeto its reference points.
See also Moving a part using handles (p. 57)
Showing part reference lines in model views (p. 58)
Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)Part positioning tips (p. 241)
Moving a part using handles
To move a part using the handles:
1. Select the part. Tekla Structures displays the handles.
2. Select the handles.
3. Move the part like any other object.
If Drag and Drop is switched on, just drag the part to a new position.
See also Part position (p. 57)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 58/260
58 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
Copying and moving objects
Selecting handles
Showing part reference lines in model views
To see the part reference line in the model:
1. Click View > View Properties...
2. Click Display... to open the Display dialog box.
3. On the Advanced tab, select the Part reference line check box.
4. Click Modify and OK.
See also Part position (p. 57)
Modifying the position of a part
To modify the position of a part, do one of the following:
See also Position on the work plane (p. 59)
To Do this
Modify part position in thepart properties dialog box
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. On the Position tab, modify the desired position settings.
For example, you can define the part to be positioned 200units above its reference points.
3. Click Modify.
Modify part position usingthe Mini Toolbar
1. Click in the Mini Toolbar.
2. Modify the settings. The object moves in the model
accordingly.• To change the overall position of the part, use the
round selection dial. Click and drag to select aposition.
• To change the rotation angle, click and drag the
green rotation angle knob.
• To change the Angle, Plane offset, or Depth offset,
enter a value in the corresponding box.
The rotation angle knob snaps to every 45 degrees. Hold down Shift tooverride this.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 59/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 59
Creating and Modifying Structures
Rotation (p. 59)
Position depth (p. 60)
Vertical position (p. 61)
Horizontal position (p. 62)
End offsets (p. 63)
Levels (p. 64)
Bending (p. 65)
Position on the work planeWhen you define the position of a part on the work plane, you have the following options:
• Middle
• Right
• Left
You can also define the distance of a part from its original reference line. To do this, type adistance in the field next to the On plane check box.
Examples
See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)
RotationWhen you define the rotation of a part around its axis on the work plane, you have thefollowing options:
• Front
• Top
• Back
Position Example
Middle
Right
Left
Middle 200
Right 200
Left 200
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 60/260
60 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
• Below
You can also define the angle of rotation. Tekla Structures measures positive values clockwisearound the local x axis.
Examples
See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)
Position depthWhen you define the position of a part in terms of its depth, perpendicular to the work plane,you have the following options:
• Middle
• Front
• Behind
Examples
Position Example
Front
Top
Back
Below
Position Example
Middle
Front
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 61/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 61
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)
Vertical positionWhen you define the vertical position of a part, relative to its reference point, you have thefollowing options:
• Middle
• Down
• Up
Examples
Behind
Middle 100
Front 100
Behind 100
Position Example
Position Example
Middle
Down
Up
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 62/260
62 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)
Horizontal positionWhen you define the horizontal position of a part, relative to its reference point, you have thefollowing options:
• Middle
• Left
• Right
Examples
Middle 100
Down 100
Up 100
Position Example
Position Example
Middle
Left
Right
Middle 100
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 63/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 63
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)
End offsetsYou can use end offsets to move the ends of a part, relative to its reference line. You can enterpositive and negative values.
You have the following options:
Examples
Left 100
Right 100
Position Example
Field Description
Dx Changes the length of the part by moving the part end point along thereference line.
Dy Moves the part end perpendicular to the reference line.
Dz Moves the part end in the z direction of the work plane.
Position Example
Dx
End point: 200
Dx
End point: -200
Dy
End point: 300
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 64/260
64 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)
LevelsFor parts that you create by picking only one point (such as columns), you can enter thepositions of the part ends, relative to the picked point, in the global z direction Tekla Structurescreates the part at the level that you defined in the part properties dialog box, not at the levelyou picked.
You have the following options:
Example In this example, the concrete columns form a two-story structure. To position the uppercolumns correctly, you must modify their bottom level position.
Dy
End point: -300
Dz
End point: 400
Dz
End point: -400
Position Example
Option Description
Bottom Use to define the position of the first end.
Top Use to define the position of the second end.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 65/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 65
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)
BendingYou can create curved parts by defining a radius and the plane of curvature.
When you initiate a command that creates a curved part, for example a curved beam, TeklaStructures prompts you to pick three points to define the radius . Alternatively, you can definethe radius in the part properties dialog box.
To have Tekla Structures draw a curved part, you need to specify the number of segments .Tekla Structures does not show curved surfaces exactly in views, instead the number of segments determines how realistic the curved part looks: the more segments, the less angularthe part appears.
You can also define the plane of curvature , which is relative to the current work plane. Theoptions are:
• XZ plane
• XY plane
Examples
Top level = 1000, Bottom level = 0
Top level = 1700, Bottom level = 1200
Slab thickness = 200
Number of segments: 2
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 66/260
66 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Modifying the position of a part (p. 58)
3.3 Steel parts
This section explains how to create steel parts.
See also Creating a steel column (p. 66)
Creating a steel beam (p. 67)
Creating a steel polybeam (p. 67)
Creating a curved beam (p. 68)
Creating a contour plate (p. 68)
Creating an orthogonal beam (p. 69)
Creating a twin profile (p. 70)
Creating a steel column
To create a steel column:
1. Optional: Modify the steel column properties.
2. Click the Create column icon.
3. Pick the position of the column.
Tekla Structures creates the column at the level that you defined in the Column
Properties dialog box.
Number of segments: 5
Number of segments: 15
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 67/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 67
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Steel column properties (p. 218)
Levels (p. 64)
Creating a steel beam
To create a steel beam:
1. Optional: Modify the steel beam properties.
2. Click the Create beam icon.
3. Pick the starting point.
4. Pick the end point.
See also Steel beam properties (p. 218)
Creating a steel polybeam
A polybeam can contain straight and curved segments. You can also create bent plates with thiscommand.
To create a steel polybeam:
1. Optional: Modify the steel beam properties.
2. Click the Create polybeam icon.
3. Pick the points you want the beam to go through.
Use the Orthogonal Beam Properties dialog box to correct the positionof a column, if the upper and lower levels were switched when thecolumn was copied and mirrored. Remember to change the part name toCOLUMN.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 68/260
68 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the polybeam.
See also Polybeam chamfers (p. 106)
Steel beam properties (p. 218)
Polybeam length calculation
Creating a curved beam
To create a curved steel beam:1. Optional: Modify the steel beam properties.
2. Click the Create curved beam icon.
3. Pick the starting point (1).
4. Pick a point on the arc (2).
5. Pick the end point (3).
See also Steel beam properties (p. 218)
Bending (p. 65)
Creating a contour p late
When you create a contour plate, the profile you use defines the thickness of the plate and thepicked points define the shape. The corners of the contour plate can be chamfered.
To create a contour plate:
1. Optional: Modify the contour plate properties.
2. Click the Create contour plate icon.
3. Pick the starting point.
4. Pick the corner points of the contour plate.
5. Pick the starting point again, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 69/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 69
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Creating a round contour plate (p. 69)
Contour plate properties (p. 219)
Creating a round contour plateTo create a round contour plate:
1. Create a square contour plate with its sides equal to the diameter of the round plate youwant to create.
2. Select the plate.
3. Double-click a handle to display the Chamfer Properties dialog box.
4. Select the round chamfer symbol from the list box.
5. Type the chamfer radius in the x field.
6. Click Modify.
7. Repeat steps 3–5 for each corner.
See also Creating a contour plate (p. 68)
Contour plate properties (p. 219)
Chamfers (p. 104)
Creating an orthogonal beam
To create a steel beam that is orthogonal to the work plane:
1. Optional: Modify the orthogonal beam properties.
2. Click Modeling > Steel Parts > Orthogonal Beam...
3. Pick the position of the beam.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 70/260
70 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Orthogonal beam properties (p. 220)
Creating a twin profile
A twin profile consists of two identical beams. You define the positions of both beams byselecting the twin profile type and setting the clearance between the beams in two directions.
To create a twin steel profile:
1. Optional: Modify the twin profile properties.
2. Click Modeling > Create Steel Part > Twin Profile.
3. Pick the starting point.
4. Pick the end point.
See also Twin profile properties (p. 221)
3.4 Assemblies
Tekla Structures creates basic assemblies of steel parts when you use a workshop weld or bolt
to join parts together. Assemblies and their main parts are automatically defined when you:
• Create single workshop welds or bolts.
• Apply automatic connections which create workshop welds or bolts.
You can also create nested assemblies by adding sub-assemblies to existing assemblies, or by joining assemblies together.
The main part in a steel assembly has other parts welded or bolted to it. By default, the mainpart is not welded or bolted to any other parts. You can change the main part in an assembly.
See also Creating an assembly (p. 71)
Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)
Removing objects from an assembly (p. 75)
Highlighting objects in an assembly (p. 75)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 71/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 71
Creating and Modifying Structures
Exploding an assembly (p. 76)
Assembly examples (p. 76)
Selecting assemblies and cast units
Creating an assembly
To create an assembly:
1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.
2. Select the parts and/or assemblies that you want to join together.
3. Right-click and select Make into Assembly from the pop-up menu.
See also Assemblies (p. 70)
Creating a sub-assembly (p. 71)
Using bolts to create assemblies (p. 71)
Using welds to create assemblies (p. 72)
Creating a sub-assemblyTo create a sub-assembly of parts that are already in an assembly:
1. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.
2. Select the parts you want to include in the sub-assembly.
3. Right-click and select Make into Sub-Assembly from the pop-up menu.
See also Creating an assembly (p. 71)
Using bol ts to create assembliesYou can use bolts to create and connect assemblies. You can create nested assemblies byconnecting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly, or you can just connect more parts toassemblies using bolts.
To control how Tekla Structures creates assemblies, use the Connect part/assembly and Bolt
type list boxes in the Bolt Properties dialog box. The order in which you select parts whencreating the connection determines the main and secondary parts of the assembly or theassembly hierarchy.
See also Assemblies (p. 70)
Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assembly (p. 72)
Connect part/assembly Bolt type Result
As sub-assembly Workshop or Site Nested assembly with the assembly you arebolting as a sub-assembly.
The first part you pick determines theassembly to which you are bolting.
As secondary part Workshop Basic assembly with the part you arebolting as a secondary part.
The first part you pick usually becomes themain part in the assembly.
As secondary part Site No assembly created.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 72/260
72 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
Bolting sub-assemblies to an existing assemblyTo bolt sub-assemblies to an existing assembly:
1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.
2. In the Connect part/assembly list box, select As sub-assembly.
3. Click Apply or OK.
4. Select a part in the assembly to bolt to.5. Select a part in the sub-assembly to be bolted.
6. Pick the bolt group origin.
7. Pick a point to indicate the bolt group x direction.
See also Using bolts to create assemblies (p. 71)
Using welds to create assembliesTekla Structures forms assemblies based on where the weld should be made. You can createworkshop welds and site welds.
The order in which you select parts when creating the connection determines the main andsecondary parts of the assembly or the assembly hierarchy. The first part you select becomesthe main part of the assembly. Tekla Structures dimensions secondary parts relative to the mainpart in assembly drawings. The largest main part in the weld becomes the main part of theassembly.
When you connect assemblies, the first part you select determines the assembly to which youweld sub-assemblies.
To control how Tekla Structures creates assemblies, use the Connect part/assembly andWorkshop/Site list boxes in the Weld Properties dialog box.
See also Assemblies (p. 70)
Welding sub-assemblies to an existing assembly (p. 72)
Welding sub-assemblies to an exist ing assemblyTo weld sub-assemblies to an existing assembly:
1. Double-click the Create weld between parts icon to open the Weld Properties dialogbox.
2. In the Connect part/assembly list box, select As sub-assembly.
3. Click Apply or OK.
4. Select a part in the assembly to weld to.
5. Select a part in the sub-assembly to be welded.
6. Optional: Create a drawing to check that the weld marks look correct.
See also Using welds to create assemblies (p. 72)
Connect part/assembly Workshop/Site Result
As sub-assembly Workshop or Site Nested assembly with the assembly you arewelding as a sub-assembly.
The first part you pick determines theassembly to which you are welding.
As secondary part Workshop Basic assembly with the part you arewelding as a secondary part.
The first part you pick usually becomes themain part in the assembly.
As secondary part Site No assembly created.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 73/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 73
Creating and Modifying Structures
Adding objects to assemblies
You can add objects to assemblies in the following ways:
See alsoAssemblies (p. 70)Assembly hierarchy (p. 73)
Adding parts to an assembly (p. 74)
Creating a nested assembly (p. 74)
Joining assemblies (p. 75)
Changing the assembly main part (p. 75)
Changing the main assembly (p. 75)
Assembly hierarchyYou can work on any level of a nested assembly, from single parts and bolts, through the basic
and sub-assemblies, up to the highest level of the nested assembly.To work with nested assemblies, you need to know how to use the Shift key and mousescrolling to select objects on different levels in assembly hierarchy.
To Do this
Create a basic assembly Do one of the following:
• Add parts to an existing assembly as secondary
parts.
• Bolt or weld parts to an existing assembly as
secondary parts.
Create a nested assembly Do one of the following:
• Add parts to an existing assembly as secondary
parts.
• Bolt or weld assemblies to an existing assembly as
sub-assemblies.
• Add assemblies to an existing assembly as sub-assemblies.
• Join existing assemblies together without adding
any loose parts.
Sub-assemblies in a nested assembly retain their own assemblyinformation and main part. You can also define properties separately forthe sub-assemblies and the nested assembly by using the part propertiesdialog box.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 74/260
74 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
Assembly hierarchy in nested assemblies affects drawings and reports. You can create separatedrawings and reports of the sub-assemblies and the nested assembly, and still producedimensions, marks, fabrication information, etc. for all assembly levels.
See also Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)
Selecting nested assemblies and components
Adding parts to an assemblyTo add secondary parts to a basic assembly or to any level of a nested assembly:
1. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.
2. Select the part you want to add.
3. Right-click and select Assembly > Add to Assembly from the pop-up menu.4. Select the assembly to add to.
See also Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)
Creating a nested assemblyTo create a nested assembly:
1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.
2. Select the assemblies you want to add to another assembly. They will become sub-assemblies in the nested assembly.
3. Right-click and select Assembly > Add as sub-assembly from the pop-up menu.
4. Select the assembly to add to.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 75/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 75
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)
Joining assembliesTo join existing assemblies without adding any loose parts:
1. Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.
2. Select the assemblies you want to join.3. Right-click and select Assembly > Make into Assembly from the pop-up menu.
The assembly with the largest volume becomes the main assembly.
See also Changing the main assembly (p. 75)
Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)
Changing the assembly main partTo change the main part in an assembly:
1. Check what is currently the main part of the assembly.
a Ensure that the Select assemblies selection switch is active.
b Click Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.c Select the assembly.
Tekla Structures highlights the main and secondary parts in different colors.
2. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.
3. Click Modeling > Assembly > Set as New Main Object of Assembly.
4. Select the new main part.
Tekla Structures changes the main part.
See also Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)
Changing the main assemblyWhen you join two or more assemblies together, the assembly with the largest volume becomesthe main assembly. You can change the main assembly at any time.
To change the main assembly in a nested assembly:
1. Select the new main assembly.
2. Right-click and select Assembly > Set as New Main Sub-Assembly from the pop-upmenu.
See also Adding objects to assemblies (p. 73)
Removing objects from an assembly
To remove objects from an assembly:
1. Select the part or sub-assembly you want to remove.
2. Right-click and select Assembly > Remove from Assembly from the pop-up menu.
See also Assemblies (p. 70)
Highlighting objects in an assembly
Use the Inquire tool to check which objects belong to a particular assembly.
To highlight objects in an assembly:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.
2. Select a part that belongs to an assembly.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 76/260
76 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
Tekla Structures highlights the other parts that belong to the same assembly. Thefollowing colors are used:
See also Assemblies (p. 70)
Exploding an assembly
When you explode a nested assembly, Tekla Structures breaks the assembly hierarchy level bylevel, always starting from the highest level. You need to use the Explode command severaltimes to break a nested assembly back to single parts.
You can also explode sub-assemblies to single parts without breaking the entire assemblyhierarchy.
To explode an assembly:
1. Select the assembly or sub-assembly you want to explode.
2. Do one of the following:
• To explode the entire assembly, right-click and select Assembly > Explode from
the pop-up menu.
• To only explode the sub-assembly, right-click and select Assembly > Explode Sub-
Assembly from the pop-up menu.
See also Assemblies (p. 70)
Assembly examples
Column corbel A column corbel is fabricated in one workshop, and then attached to the column in anotherworkshop. Model the corbel as a sub-assembly of the column. Then create an assemblydrawing for each workshop: one assembly drawing showing how the corbel is welded together,another assembly drawing showing how the corbel and the other part are welded to the column.
Object type Highlight color
Concrete - main part magentaConcrete - secondary part cyan
Reinforcement blue
Steel part - main part orange
Steel part - secondary part yellow
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 77/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 77
Creating and Modifying Structures
Complex truss Model the halves of a complex truss as assemblies. Create assembly drawings for the workshopto fabricate the truss halves. Then create another assembly drawing showing how the halvesshould be joined on site.
Built-up profile In a frame of built-up columns and beams, each built-up profile can be a sub-assembly. You cancreate an assembly drawing showing the entire frame, and separate drawings showing how thecolumns and beams are constructed.
See also Assemblies (p. 70)
Assembly drawing
3.5 Concrete parts
This section explains how to create concrete parts.
See also Creating a pad footing (p. 78)
Creating a strip footing (p. 78)
Creating a concrete column (p. 78)
Creating a concrete beam (p. 79)Creating a concrete polybeam (p. 79)
Drawing 2, Workshop 2
Drawing 1, Workshop 1
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 78/260
78 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
Creating a concrete slab (p. 80)
Creating a concrete panel (p. 81)
Creating a pad footing
To create a pad footing:
1. Optional: Modify the pad footing properties.
2. Click the Create pad footing icon.
3. Pick the pad footing position.
See also Pad footing properties (p. 222)
Creating a strip footing
To create a strip footing:
1. Optional: Modify the strip footing properties.
2. Click the Create strip footing icon.
3. Pick the points you want the footing to go through.
4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the footing.
See also Strip footing properties (p. 223)
Creating a concrete column
To create a concrete column:
1. Optional: Modify the concrete column properties.
2. Click the Create concrete column icon.
3. Pick the position of the column.
Tekla Structures creates the column at the level that you defined in the Concrete
Column Properties dialog box.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 79/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 79
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Concrete column properties (p. 224)
Creating a concrete beam
To create a concrete beam:
1. Optional: Modify the concrete beam properties.
2. Click the Create concrete beam icon.
3. Pick the starting point.
4. Pick the end point.
See also Concrete beam properties (p. 225)
Creating a concrete polybeam
A polybeam can contain straight and curved segments. You can also create concrete bent plateswith this command.
To create a concrete polybeam:
1. Optional: Modify the concrete beam properties.
2. Click the Create concrete polybeam icon.
3. Pick the points you want the beam to go through.
4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the polybeam.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 80/260
80 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Polybeam chamfers (p. 106)
Concrete beam properties (p. 225)
Polybeam length calculation
Creating a concrete slab
When you create a concrete slab, the profile you use defines the thickness of the slab and thepicked points define the shape. The corners of the slab can be chamfered.
To create a concrete slab:
1. Optional: Modify the concrete slab properties.
2. Click the Create concrete slab icon.
3. Pick the starting point.
4. Pick the corner points of the slab.
5. Pick the starting point again, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
See also Creating a round slab (p. 80)
Concrete slab properties (p. 225)
Creating a round slabTo create a round slab:
1. Create a square slab with sides equal to the diameter of the round slab you want tocreate.
2. Select the slab.3. Double-click a handle to display the Chamfer Properties dialog box.
4. Select the round chamfer symbol from the list box.
5. Type the chamfer radius in the x field.
6. Click Modify.
7. Repeat steps 3–5 for each corner.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 81/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 81
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Creating a concrete slab (p. 80)
Concrete slab properties (p. 225)
Chamfers (p. 104)
Creating a concrete panel
To create a concrete panel:1. Optional: Modify the concrete panel properties.
2. Click the Create concrete panel icon.
3. Pick the points you want the panel to go through.
4. Double-click the end point, or click the middle mouse button to finish picking.
5. Optional: To create curved segments, chamfer the corners of the panel.
See also Concrete panel properties
Chamfers (p. 104)
3.6 Cast units
The concrete structures in Tekla Structures are modeled as single parts. By default, each part isconsidered a separate cast unit. For construction purposes you may need to merge severalconcrete parts into one cast unit. For example, a single cast unit could consist of a column withcorbels.
You need to specify which parts form the cast unit. Cast units can include reinforcement, aswell as concrete parts.
The main part in a concrete cast unit is the one with the largest volume of concrete. You canchange the main part in a cast unit.
See also Creating a cast unit (p. 82)
Adding objects to cast units (p. 82)
Removing objects from a cast unit (p. 83)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 82/260
82 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
Highlighting objects in a cast unit (p. 83)
Exploding a cast unit (p. 83)
Defining the cast unit type (p. 83)
Casting direction (p. 84)
Creating a cast unit
To create a cast unit:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Create.
2. Select the objects you want to include in the cast unit.
3. Click the middle mouse button to create the cast unit.
See also Cast units (p. 81)
Adding objects to cast units
This section explains how to add objects to a cast unit.
See also Cast units (p. 81)
Adding concrete objects to a cast unit (p. 82)
Adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit (p. 82)
Changing the cast unit main part (p. 82)
Adding concrete objects to a cast unitTo add concrete objects to a cast unit:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Add to.
2. Select the objects you want to add.3. Select an object in the cast unit.
See also Adding objects to cast units (p. 82)
Adding non-concrete objects to a cast uni tUse the Add as Sub-Assembly command when adding non-concrete objects to a cast unit.This applies to anything that is not concrete, such as steel parts and insulation.
To add a non-concrete part to a cast unit:
1. Ensure that the Select components selection switch is active.
2. Click Modeling > Assembly > Add as Sub-Assembly.
3. Select the non-concrete part you want to add.4. Select the cast unit to which you want to add the part.
See also Adding objects to cast units (p. 82)
Changing the cast unit main partTo change the main part in a cast unit:
1. Optional: To check what is currently the main part of the cast unit, click Tools > Inquire
> Assembly Objects.
2. Ensure that the Select objects in assemblies selection switch is active.
3. Select the new main part.
4. Right-click and select Set as New Main Part of Assembly from the pop-up menu.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 83/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 83
Creating and Modifying Structures
See also Adding objects to cast units (p. 82)
Removing objects from a cast unit
To remove objects from a cast unit:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Remove From.2. Select the objects you want to remove.
See also Cast units (p. 81)
Highlighting objects in a cast unit
Use the Inquire tool to check which objects belong to a particular cast unit.
To highlight objects in a cast unit:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Assembly Objects.
2. Select a part that belongs to a cast unit.
Tekla Structures highlights the other parts that belong to the same cast unit. Thefollowing colors are used:
See also Cast units (p. 81)
Exploding a cast unit
To explode a cast unit:
1. Click Modeling > Cast Unit > Explode.
2. Select an object in the cast unit you want to explode.
See also Cast units (p. 81)
Defining the cast unit type
Tekla Structures checks the cast unit type of the cast unit main part each time you create ormodify a cast unit. Tekla Structures does not mix precast and cast-in-place parts inside a castunit.
To define whether a concrete part is precast or cast in place:
1. Double-click a concrete part to open the concrete part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Cast unit tab.
3. In the Cast unit type list box, select Precast or Cast in place.
4. Click Modify to save the changes.
See also Cast units (p. 81)
Object type Highlight color
Concrete - main part magenta
Concrete - secondary part cyan
Reinforcement blue
Steel part - main part orange
Steel part - secondary part yellow
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 84/260
84 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Creating and Modifying Structures
Casting direction
To indicate the casting direction of a concrete part, you can define which part face you want tohave on top of the casting form. The top-in-form face is displayed in the front view of adrawing.
Tekla Structures highlights the top-in-form face in red:
See also Cast units (p. 81)
Defining the casting direction of a part (p. 84)
Defin ing the casting di rection of a partTo define the casting direction of a concrete part:
1. Select a concrete part.
2. Right-click and select Cast Unit > Set Top in Form Face.
3. Select the part face that will face upwards in the form.
See also Casting direction (p. 84)
Showing the top-in-form faceTo display the top-in-form face of a concrete part:
1. Select a concrete part.
2. Right-click and select Cast Unit > Show Top in Form Face.
See also Casting direction (p. 84)
In drawings, use the Fixed coordinate system to show the top-in-formface in the front view.
To hide the top-in-form face again, right-click the view and selectUpdate Window from the pop-up menu.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 85/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 85
Detailing Structures
4 Detailing Structures
This section explains how to create details using Tekla Structures. It also gives you sometechniques for fine-tuning part shapes.
Contents • Bolts (p. 85)
• Holes (p. 89)
• Welds (p. 91)
• Surface treatment (p. 95)
• Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)
• Combining parts (p. 116)
•Splitting parts (p. 117)
4.1 Bolts
To create bolts, you can either create a single bolt group or apply a component thatautomatically creates bolt groups.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 86/260
86 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
For more information on using components to automatically create bolt groups, see Definingbolts and welds in the Detailing Manual.
You can create different part marks for holes and bolts in drawings.
You cannot use bolt elements (such as screws, washers, and nuts) while creating holes, as TeklaStructures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes.
See also Creating a bolt group (p. 86)
Creating a single bolt (p. 88)
Changing or adding bolted parts (p. 88)
The bolt and bolt assembly catalogs
Creating a bolt group
To create a bolt group:
1. Optional: Modify the bolt properties.
2. Click Detailing > Bolts > Create Bolts.
3. Select the main part, to which the secondary parts will be bolted.
4. Select the secondary parts.
5. Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts.
6. Pick a point, which is the bolt group origin.
7. Pick a second point to indicate the bolt group x direction.
See also Bolts (p. 85)
Bolt properties (p. 227)
Bolt group shape (p. 86)
Bolt group position (p. 87)
Bolt offsets (p. 88)
Bolt group shapeYou have the following options for bolt group shape:
• Array for rectangular
• Circle for circular
• xy list for any shape
Tekla Structures uses the values of the Bolt dist X and Bolt dist Y fields to determine howmany bolts the bolt group contains, as shown in the table below:
You can also create a new bolt group by modifying an existing one. Inmost cases it is easier to create bolt groups by applying a component thatincludes bolt groups.
To create new bolts by modifying an existing bolt group:
1. Apply a component.
2. Explode the component.
3. Modify the bolt group.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 87/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 87
Detailing Structures
Examples
See also Creating a bolt group (p. 86)
Bolt group positionTekla Structures determines the location of the bolt group using the following values:
• Bolt group x axis
• Work plane
Shape Bolt dist X Bolt dist Y
Array Spacing between bolts, in the xdirection of the bolt group.
Spacing between bolts, in the ydirection of the bolt group.
Circle Number of bolts. Diameter of the bolt group.
xy list x coordinate of each bolt, fromthe bolt group point of origin.
y coordinate of each bolt, from thebolt group point of origin.
Bolt group shape Dimensions Picture
Array Bolt dist X: 150
Bolt dist Y: 100
Circle Number of bolts: 6
Diameter: 100
xy list Bolt dist X: 75 175 250
Bolt dist Y: 75 -50 0
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 88/260
88 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
Dimensions are relative to the bolt group origin , which is the first point you pick whencreating a bolt group. Tekla Structures sets the x direction of a bolt group using the secondpoint picked.
It is important that the points you pick to create the bolt group are close enough to the parts youwant to connect.
See also Creating a bolt group (p. 86)
Bolt offsetsYou can use offsets to change the position of the bolt group. Offsets move the bolt group bymoving the x axis of the bolt group.
The starting point values Dx, Dy and Dz move the first end of the bolt group, relative to the boltgroup x axis. The end point values move the second end of the bolt group.
• A positive Dx value moves the starting point towards the end point.
• Dy moves the end point perpendicular to the bolt group x axis on the current work plane.
• Dz moves the end point perpendicular to the current work plane.
Example An example bolt group with the Dx starting point set to 75:
See also Creating a bolt group (p. 86)
Creating a single bolt
To create a single bolt:
1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.
2. Under Bolt group, select Array from the Shape list box.3. In the Bolt dist X and Bolt dist Y fields, type 0.
4. Click Apply to save the changes.
5. Create the bolt the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions onthe status bar.
See also Bolts (p. 85)
Bolt properties (p. 227)
Creating a bolt group (p. 86)
Changing or adding bolted parts
To change the parts a bolt group connects to:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 89/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 89
Detailing Structures
1. Click Detailing > Bolts > Edit Bolted Parts.
2. When prompted, reselect the main and secondary parts.
Tekla Structures automatically updates bolt length to suit these changes.
See also Bolts (p. 85)
4.2 Holes
Tekla Structures uses the same command for creating bolts and holes. Before creating holes,you need to change some of the properties in the Bolt Properties dialog box.
If you want to create only holes without any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes:
You can create the following types of holes:
• Round
• Oversized
• Slotted
• Tapped
See also Creating round holes (p. 89)
Creating oversized holes (p. 90)
Creating slotted holes (p. 90)
Creating round holes
Tekla Structures calculates the diameter of a round hole as the sum of Bolt size and Tolerance.
To create round holes:1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.
2. Optional: Modify the hole properties.
3. If you do not want to create any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes.
4. Click Apply to save the changes.
5. Create the holes the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions onthe status bar.
See also Holes (p. 89)
Creating a bolt group (p. 86)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 90/260
90 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
Creating slot ted holes
To create slotted holes:
1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.
2. To indicate which parts should be slotted, select the desired Parts with slotted holes check boxes.
Tekla Structures counts the pieces of steel from the head of the bolt down. For example,if you select the second check box from the head of the bolt, Tekla Structures slots thesecond piece of steel from the head of the bolt.
3. If you do not want to create any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes.
4. In the Hole type list box, select Slotted.
5. Enter the allowance for the slotted hole in the x and y directions of the hole group usingthe Slotted hole X or Slotted hole Y fields.
6. Optional: In the Rotate slots list box, select Even or Odd to rotate alternate holes by 90degrees.
7. Click Apply to save the changes.
8. Create the holes the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions onthe status bar.
See also Holes (p. 89)
Creating a bolt group (p. 86)
Creating oversized holes
To create oversized holes:
Tolerance
Slotted hole X or Y
Bolt size
Crossing slotted holes to odd or even parts
Parallel slotted holes
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 91/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 91
Detailing Structures
1. Double-click the Create bolts icon to open the Bolt Properties dialog box.
2. Select the desired Parts with slotted holes check boxes to indicate which plies of theconnection get oversized holes.
3. If you do not want to create any bolts, clear all the Include in bolt assembly check boxes.
4. In the Hole type list box, select Oversized.
5. In the Oversize field, enter the allowance for the oversized hole.You can also use a negative value to create smaller (tapped) holes.
6. Click Apply to save the changes.
7. Create the holes the same way you would create a bolt group. Follow the instructions onthe status bar.
See also Holes (p. 89)
Creating a bolt group (p. 86)
4.3 WeldsYou can either create a weld manually, or use a component that automatically creates welds.
The following types of welds can be created manually:
• Weld between parts
Tekla Structures welds two parts together using the weld position defined in the Weld
Properties dialog box. The length of the weld depends on the length of the connectionbetween the welded parts.
• Polygon weld
You define the exact position of the weld by picking the points you want the weld totraverse.
• Single-part weld
Tekla Structures creates a weld to a single part, without connecting any other parts.
See also Creating a weld between parts (p. 91)
Creating a polygon weld (p. 93)
Creating a weld to a part (p. 94)
Weld preparation (p. 94)
Creating a weld between parts
To weld parts together:
1. Optional: Modify the weld properties.
2. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Weld between Parts.
3. Select the part to weld to.
If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the main part of the assembly.
4. Select the part to be welded.
If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the secondary part of the assembly.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 92/260
92 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
See also Welds (p. 91)
Weld properties (p. 229)
Weld position (p. 92)
Weld size prefixes (p. 93)
Using welds to create assemblies (p. 72)
Weld positionYou define the position of a weld relative to the work plane. The type and position of the partsto be welded affect the position of the weld.
The options for weld position are:
• x
• y
• z
These can all be in a positive or negative direction. Tekla Structures creates the weld on theface or side of the part that faces in the selected direction (x, y, or z).
Example The following image shows welds in different positions. If there are no faces that touch in thespecified direction, Tekla Structures places the weld relative to the center point of thesecondary part.
See also Creating a weld between parts (p. 91)
Main part
Secondary part
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 93/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 93
Detailing Structures
Weld size prefixesThe weld size prefix is shown in drawings, but only if the Size checkbox is also selected.
The following table describes the standard ISO 2553 prefixes:
See also Creating a weld between parts (p. 91)
Creating a polygon weld
To weld parts together using a polygon:
1. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Polygon Weld.
2. Select the part to weld to.
If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the main part of the assembly.
3. Select the part to be welded.
If you are creating a workshop weld, this is the secondary part of the assembly.
4. Pick the starting and end point, or alternatively, pick the points you want the weld to gothrough.
5. Click the middle mouse button to create the weld.
Prefix Descriptiona Design throat thickness
s Penetration throat thickness
z Leg length
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 94/260
94 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
See also Welds (p. 91)
Using welds to create assemblies (p. 72)
Creating a weld to a part
To create a weld to a part, without connecting any other parts:
1. Click Detailing > Weld > Create Weld to Part.
2. Select the part that you want to weld.
3. Pick the starting and end point, or alternatively, pick the points you want the weld to gothrough.
4. Click the middle mouse button to create the weld.
Example Use the Create Weld to Part command to weld seams in tubular sections:
See also Welds (p. 91)
Weld preparation
When parts are prepared for welding, their edges can be beveled to produce a groove for theweld. You can define the angle of bevels and grooves.
You can either prepare a part for welding manually, or apply a component that does itautomatically.
See also Welds (p. 91)
Manually preparing a part for welding (p. 94)
Welded connections
Manually preparing a part for weldingBefore you start, create a cutting part and position it through the part you want to cut.
To manually prepare a part to be welded:
1. Click Detailing > Weld > Prepare Part for Welding.
2. Select the part that you want to cut.
To model tubular sections with visible seams, use the SPD profile.
To prevent automatic weld preparation, set the variableXS_DISABLE_WELD_PREP_SOLID to TRUE in your environmentinitialization file.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 95/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 95
Detailing Structures
3. Select the cutting part.
See also Weld preparation (p. 94)
4.4 Surface treatment
Use the surface treatment tools to add surface treatment to parts. Surface treatment for concreteparts include flat finishes, surface mixes, and tiles. Surface treatment for steel parts includefire-proofing and unpainted areas, for example. Surface treatments are visible only in rendered
views.
When you redefine the properties of a part (e.g. you change the size of a part), Tekla Structuresautomatically modifies the surface treatment to fit the part.
When you create overlapping surface treatments, the smaller surface treatment overrides thelarger one. The overlapping area is recognized in reports: only the topmost (visible) surfacetreatment is calculated.
The part to be cut
The cutting part
Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 96/260
96 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
See also Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)
Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)
Creating new surface treatment options (p. 99)
Tiled surface treatment (p. 100)
Modifying surface treatment properties
To define the properties of a surface treatment:
1. Click Detailing > Properties > Surface Treatment... to open the Surface Treatment
Properties dialog box.
2. In the Type list box, select the type of surface treatment to use.
3. In the Surface treatment name list box, select the specific surface treatment.
4. Click the Select... to select a material from the catalog.
5. Enter the Thickness of the surface treatment.
6. Set the Color to use to display the surface treatment in rendered views.7. In the At depth list box, select the location of the surface treatment. The options are
Middle, Front, and Behind.
8. Optional: To define the properties of a tiled surface treatment:
a On the Attributes tab, select Tile surface from the Type list box.
b On the Pattern tab, select the pattern from the Pattern type list box.
c The Definition table lists the properties of the pattern type.
9. Click Apply or OK to save the surface treatment properties.
See also Surface treatment (p. 95)
Adding surface treatment to partsThis section explains how to add surface treatment to a part.
See also Surface treatment (p. 95)
Adding surface treatment to a selected area (p. 97)
Adding surface treatment to a part face (p. 97)
Adding surface treatment to all faces of a part (p. 97)
Adding surface treatment to cut faces (p. 97)
Surface treatment on chamfered parts (p. 98)
Surface treatment on parts with openings and recesses (p. 98)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 97/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 97
Detailing Structures
Adding surface treatment to a selected areaTo add surface treatment to a selected area on the face of a part:
1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To Selected Area on Part Face.
2. Pick the origin of the surface treatment.
3. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the surface treatment.
4. Select an area of the part face to apply the surface treatment to.a Move the mouse cursor over a part. The faces that you can select appear in blue.
b Select the part face.
c Pick three or more points on the part face to define a polygonal area.
See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)
Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)
Adding surface treatment to a part faceTo add surface treatment to the entire face of a part:
1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To Part Face.
2. Pick the origin of the surface treatment.3. Pick a point to indicate the direction of the surface treatment.
4. Select the part to apply the surface treatment to.
a Move the mouse cursor over a part. The faces that you can select appear in blue.
b Select the part face.
See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)
Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)
Adding surface treatment to all faces of a partTo add surface treatment to all faces of a part:
1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment > To All Faces of Part.2. Select the part to apply the surface treatment to.
See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)
Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)
Adding surface treatment to cut facesTo add surface treatment to cut faces:
1. Click Detailing > Create Surface Treatment, and then select either To Part Face or To
Selected Area on Part Face.
2. Pick the origin of the surface treatment.
3. Pick the direction.4. Select the cut face to apply the surface treatment to:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 98/260
98 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
5. If you are using the To Selected Area on Part Face command, pick the points to definethe area of the surface treatment.
See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)
Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)
Surface treatment on chamfered partsTake these things into account when adding surface treatment to chamfered parts:
• Surface treatment does not work on sketched profiles with chamfers.
• Add surface treatment before chamfering the part. If surface treatment is applied to a
chamfered part, the surface treatment chamfer cannot be modified later on.
• The chamfers for the main part and surface treatment are separate. Modifying the mainpart chamfer does not affect the surface treatment chamfer.
• The orientation of unsymmetric chamfers depends on the face where it was created (such
as top, bottom, left, or right). To change the orientation of an unsymmetric chamfer, youmust swap the chamfer's x and y values.
See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)
Surface treatment on parts w ith openings and recessesTo force Tekla Structures to consider openings and recesses in parts when adding surfacetreatment, select the Cut by father part cuts checkbox in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 99/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 99
Detailing Structures
See also Adding surface treatment to parts (p. 96)
Modifying surface treatment properties (p. 96)
Creating new surface treatment options
You can add new options to the Surface treatment name list box in the Surface TreatmentProperties dialog box.
To create new surface treatment options:
1. Open the product_finishes.dat file using any text editor.
The file is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.
The first section of the file defines the available types of surface treatment. Do not editthis section:
The green surface treatment has the Cut by father part cuts check boxselected
The tiled surface treatment is not cut by the cut in the part: Cut by father
part cuts is not selected.
If you use the To All Faces of Part command and select the Cut by
father part cuts checkbox, Tekla Structures automatically adds surfacetreatment also to the cut faces.
This section is for advanced users.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 100/260
100 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
2. Go to the sections that define the options for each type of surface treatment:
3. Add rows to define new options.
a Define the surface treatment type. For example, 1 for concrete finish.
b Define a code for the surface treatment option. For example, MF for MagnesiumFloat.
c Define the full name of the surface treatment option. For example, MagnesiumFloat. Remember to enclose the name in double quotes " ".
4. Save the file.
See also Surface treatment (p. 95)
Tiled surface treatment
Tekla Structures includes complex tile and brick surface treatment options, such asbasketweave and herringbone patterns. Tiled surface treatment options are based on repeatingtile patterns that are stored in XML format.
See also Surface treatment (p. 95)
Creating new tile patterns (p. 100)
Example pattern definition (p. 101)
Creating new tile patternsTo create new tile patterns:
1. Open the TilePatternCatalog.xml file using any text editor.
The file is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system folder.
2. Add a new <TilePattern> element to the file.
// Product finishes
// -------------------------
//
// Type : Type of surfacing
// 1 = concrete finish
// 2 = special mix// 3 = tile surface
// 4 = steel finishes
// =========================================
// *** Concrete Finish
// =========================================
// WET FINISH
// ----------
1 MF "Magnesium Float"
1 SMF "Smooth Magnesium Float"
1 WT "Wet Trowel"
This section is for advanced users.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 101/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 101
Detailing Structures
The <TilePattern> element must have <HOffset> and <VOffset> elements and atleast one <Tile> element. Other elements are optional.
3. Repeat adding <TilePattern> elements for all the patterns you want to define.
4. Save the TilePatternCatalog.xml file.
See also Tiled surface treatment (p. 100)
Example pattern definition (p. 101)
Tile pattern definitions (p. 103)
Tile pattern elements (p. 104)
Example pattern definitionThis example explains how the Basketweave tile pattern is defined in theTilePatternCatalog.xml file.
The Basketweave pattern block is made up of eight tiles:
You may find it easier to copy one of the existing elements, and thenmodify it to suit your needs.
Tile width
Mortar width
VOffset
HOffset
Red marks indicate TileOrigin. Angle value for vertical tiles is 90
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 102/260
102 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
The pattern is repeated in the x and y direction of the surface treatment, starting from the origin
of the surface treatment. You can run the pattern in different x directions:
In the TilePatternCatalog.xml file, the pattern is defined as follows:
Tile height
Mortar height
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 103/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 103
Detailing Structures
The definition file uses the same symbols as the pattern definition table in the Surface
Treatment Properties dialog box:
See also Creating new tile patterns (p. 100)
Tile pattern definitions (p. 103)
Tile pattern elements (p. 104)
Tile pattern definitionsThe predefined tile patterns that are available in the Surface Treatment Properties dialog boxare stored in the following files:
See also Tiled surface treatment (p. 100)
The name of the pattern
The size of the pattern block in the x direction, after which the patternrepeats
The size of the pattern block in the y direction, after which the pattern
repeats
File Description
TilePatternCatalog.xml • Contains the tile pattern definitions.
• Located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments
\<environment>\system folder.
TilePatternCatalog.dtd • Document Type Declaration (DTD) file that
defines the elements allowed in the
TilePatternCatalog.xml file.
• Located in the same folder as the
TilePatternCatalog.xml file.
Thumbnail images • The images that appear in the Picture field in the
Surface Treatment Properties dialog box.
• Located in the ..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder.
• Filenames identify the pattern types. For example,
herringbone.bmp illustrates the herringbonepattern type.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 104/260
104 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
Tile pattern elementsThe TilePatternCatalog.xml file can contain the following elements:
See also Tiled surface treatment (p. 100)
4.5 Fine-tuning part shape
This section describes the various tools you can use to fine-tune the shape of a part.
See also Chamfers (p. 104)
Fittings (p. 108)
Cuts (p. 109)
Modifying the shape of a polygon (p. 112)
Warping concrete parts (p. 113)
Cambering parts (p. 115)
Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 115)
Combining parts (p. 116)
Splitting parts (p. 117)
Chamfers
Chamfers are modeling details that can be used to refine the shape of parts for aesthetic,practical, and manufacturing reasons. In Tekla Structures, you can chamfer part corners andpart edges.
Limitations Only the following parts have corner chamfers: contour plates, concrete slabs, and parts thatyou create by picking more than two points (strip footings, steel and concrete polybeams, andconcrete panels).
The end points of a part do not have corner chamfers. The handles that you select must be atcorner points or between two segments of a part.
Element Description
TilePatternCatalog The container for tile patterns. Required.
TilePattern Tile pattern element. Required. This element can contain thefollowing elements listed in this table.
HOffset Horizontal offset of the tile pattern. Required.
VOffset Vertical offset of the tile pattern. Required.
Tile The individual tiles used in a tile pattern. At least onerequired.
Color Color of the tile or mortar, defined by the RGB values (0–255). Optional.
Parameter Creates an attribute for any element in the TilePattern.Optional.
Label The label that identifies a parameter in the dialog box.Optional.
TileOrigin The origin of an individual tile, defined from the origin of thepattern. Optional.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 105/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 105
Detailing Structures
See also Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)
Chamfering part corners (p. 105)
Chamfering part edges (p. 107)
Chamfering part corners
When Tekla Structures creates a part, by default it has a rectangular chamfer at each corner,which does not change the geometry of the part. You can modify the default chamfers.
To modify a corner chamfer:
1. Select the part.
2. Double-click the handle of any part corner.
The Chamfer Properties dialog box is displayed.
3. Modify the chamfer properties.
4. Select the handles of the part corners you want to modify.
5. Click Modify.
See also Chamfers (p. 104)
Corner chamfer properties (p. 232)
Corner chamfer types and dimensions (p. 105)
Polybeam chamfers (p. 106)
Corner chamfer types and dimensionsStraight chamfers can have different dimensions in two directions. Tekla Structures only usesone dimension for curved chamfers.
The coordinates follow the part’s local coordinate system.
The table below describes the chamfer types and dimensions used with the Create Chamfer >
For Part Corner command.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 106/260
106 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
See also Chamfering part corners (p. 105)
Polybeam chamfersBy default, Tekla Structures places a rectangular corner chamfer between each polybeamsegment. You can modify the default chamfers.
Tekla Structures shows the status of polybeam chamfers using the following colors:
Type Icon Dimensions
None x: not used
y: not used
Line x:the distance in the x coordinate direction from thecorner
y: the distance in the y coordinate direction from thecorner
Rounding x: the radius
y: not used
Arc x: the radius
y: not used
Arc point x: not used
y: not used
Square The chamfer is perpendicular to the edges.
x: the distance in the x coordinate direction from thecorner
y: the distance in the y coordinate direction from thecorner
Square
parallel
The chamfer is parallel to the opposite edge.
x: the distance in the x coordinate direction from thecorner
y: the distance in the y coordinate direction from thecorner
Line and
arc
x (if smaller than y): the arc radius
x (if bigger than y): the distance in the x coordinatedirection from the corner
y (if smaller than x): the arc radius
y (if bigger than x): the distance in the y coordinatedirection from the corner
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 107/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 107
Detailing Structures
See also Chamfering part corners (p. 105)
Chamfering part edgesTo chamfer the edge of a part:
1. Click Detailing > Create Chamfer > For Part Edge.
2. Select the part you want to chamfer.
3. Pick a point where you want the chamfer to start on the part edge.
4. Pick a second point where you want the chamfer to end on the part edge.
Tekla Structures displays the chamfer in light blue color.
5. Optional: Modify the chamfer.
a Double-click the chamfer to open the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog box.b Modify the chamfer properties.
Color Description Example
Magenta Correct chamfer
Yellow Correct chamfer thatcannot be unfolded
Red Incorrect chamfer
To see the chamfer lines of polybeams, set the advanced optionXS_DRAW_CHAMFERS_HANDLES to CHAMFERS.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 108/260
108 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
c Click OK.
6. Right-click the view and select Redraw View.
Tekla Structures removes the chamfered edge.
See also Edge chamfer properties (p. 232)
Chamfers (p. 104)
Fittings
You can fit the end of a part to a plane by creating a straight cutting line between two points youpick.
You can use fittings to extend or shorten parts inside a component, which makes it easier tocreate connections, details, and so on. Do not use fittings to otherwise change the length of apart in the model.
A fitting adjusts the end of a beam on a plane, perpendicular to the view plane, which passesthrough the cutting line you pick. Fittings cannot be used on contour plates.
See also Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)
Creating a fitting (p. 108)
Creating a fittingTo create a fitting:
1. Click Detailing > Fit Part End.
2. Select the part you want to cut with a fitting.
3. Pick the first point of the cutting line.
4. Pick the second point of the cutting line.
Fitting symbol
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 109/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 109
Detailing Structures
See also Fittings (p. 108)
Cuts
You can use cuts to shape a part. Do not use cuts for cutting the entire part end.
See also Cutting parts with a line (p. 111)
Cutting parts with a polygon (p. 111)
Cutting parts with another part (p. 112)
Hiding cut lines in a view (p. 240)
Cutting efficiently (p. 240)
Line cutsA line cut cuts the end of a beam on a plane that passes through the line you pick. TeklaStructures displays the cut line using dash-and-dot lines.
By default, line cuts do not affect beam length in NC files. For more information on how tochange this, see Fittings affect NC data.
See also Cutting parts with a line (p. 111)
Polygon cutsA polygon cut cuts a part using a polygonal shape. Tekla Structures displays the cut using dash-
and-dot lines. You must create cuts in a plane view.
Do not apply a second fitting on the same part end, because then TeklaStructures will ignore the first fitting. This happens if you use the Fit
Part End command for cutting and try to make two cuts on the same partend. In situations like this, use the Cut Part commands instead.
Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines
Cut lines are hidden
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 110/260
110 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
See also Cutting parts with a polygon (p. 111)
Part cutsYou can cut a part using another part. Tekla Structures displays the cut using dash-and-dotlines.
You can cut parts that already have cuts. This can be useful, for example, when you want tocreate more sophisticated cut shapes.
Polygon-shaped cut
Cut lines are hidden
You should always define the polygon so that there is some tolerancebetween the edges. If the edge of a cutting polygon is in exactly the sameposition as the edge of the part to be cut, it can be unclear whether theedge should be cut away.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 111/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 111
Detailing Structures
See also Cutting parts with another part (p. 112)
Cutting parts with a lineUse line cuts to shape the end of a beam or column.
To cut a part with a line:
1. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Line.2. Select the part you want to cut.
3. Pick the first point of the cutting line.
4. Pick the second point of the cutting line.
5. Pick the side you want to remove.
See also Cuts (p. 109)
Line cuts (p. 109)
Cutting parts with a polygonTo cut a part using a polygonal shape:
1. Ensure that the work plane is on the plane you are cutting on.For example, if you are creating a polygonal cut on the yz plane, you should temporarilyset your work plane to the yz plane as well.
2. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Polygon.
3. Select the part you want to cut.
4. Pick positions to outline the polygon to be used for cutting.
5. To close the polygon, click the middle mouse button or click Edit > Finish Polygon
Input.
See also Cuts (p. 109)
Polygon cuts (p. 109)
Cuts are displayed using dash-and-dot lines
Cut lines are hidden
Do not create cuts with the same planes or vertices. This makes itunclear what should be cut away.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 112/260
112 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
Cutting parts with another partBefore you start, create a cutting part and position it through the part you want to cut.
To cut a part with another part:
1. Click Detailing > Cut Part > With Another Part
2. Select the part you want to cut.
3. Select the cutting part.
Tekla Structures cuts the selected main part. The part cut does not affect other parts.
4. Delete the cutting part.
a Ensure that the Select cuts and fittings selection switch is off.
b Select the cutting part and press Delete.
See also Cuts (p. 109)
Part cuts (p. 110)
Modifying the shape of a polygon
You can modify the shape of the following polygonal parts: steel and concrete polybeams,contour plates, concrete slabs, concrete panels, and strip footings.
To modify the shape of a polygonal part:
1. Select the part you want to modify.
2. Click Detailing > Modify Polygon Shape.
3. Pick an existing corner (1).
4. Pick new corners for the polygon (2, 3).
5. Pick another existing corner (4).
6. Pick the corner to remove (5).
See also Moving an object
Moving an object using drag-and-drop
Part position (p. 57)
Alternatively, move the handles using drag-and-drop or the Move command.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 113/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 113
Detailing Structures
Warping concrete parts
Use the following methods to warp concrete parts:
See also Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)
Warping a beam using deformation angles (p. 113)
Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfers (p. 113)
Warping a Floor Bay (66) slab (p. 114)
Warping a beam using deformation angles
To warp a beam:
1. Double-click the beam to open the Beam properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Deforming tab.
3. In the Start field, enter the angle of the beam at its start point, relative to the partreference line.
4. In the End field, enter the angle of the beam at its end point, relative to the part referenceline.
For example, to warp the beam 45 degrees at the end point, type 0 in the Start anglefield and 45 in the End angle field.
5. Click Modify to warp the beam.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box.
See also Warping concrete parts (p. 113)
Warping a concrete slab by moving chamfersBefore you start, create a concrete slab by using the Create concrete slab command.
To warp a concrete slab by moving the chamfers:
1. Double-click a chamfer to open the Chamfer Properties dialog box.
2. Modify the chamfer properties.
• To move the upper corner of the chamfer, use the dz1 field.
• To move the lower corner of the chamfer, use the dz2 field.
3. Click Modify to warp the slab.
To Do this
Warp a concrete beam Use the deforming options in the partproperties dialog box.
Warp a concrete slab Move the chamfers.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 114/260
114 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
See also Warping concrete parts (p. 113)
Warping a Floor Bay (66) slabBefore you start, create a concrete slab by using the Modeling of floor bay (66) component.
To warp a Floor Bay (66) slab by moving chamfers:
1. Ensure that the Select components selection switch is on.
2. Select the chamfer you want to move.
For example, select the corner point of a slab component to warp that end of the slab:
3. Right-click and select Move Special > Linear from the pop-up menu.4. In the Move - Linear dialog box, type a value in the appropriate direction field.
For example, type 100 in the dZ field to lift that corner up 100 mm.
5. Click Move.
Tekla Structures moves the point in the direction you selected, which warps the slabs.
6. Right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu to finish.
7. Ensure that the Select objects in components selection switch is on.
8. To see the warping angle of a single slab, double-click a slab to open the Beam
properties dialog box, and go to the Deforming tab.
• The Start field shows the warping angle at the start point of the part.
• The End field shows the warping angle at the end point of the part.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 115/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 115
Detailing Structures
See also Warping concrete parts (p. 113)
Cambering parts
You can use cambering to pre-camber parts, in other words, to curve long heavy sections that
will settle on site and become flat.Use cambering to show the natural camber of a prestressed part in a model. Cambering affectsthe position of cuts, skews, and embeds in the model.
Tekla Structures cambers parts in the local z direction.
See also Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)
Cambering a part (p. 115)
Cambering a part
To camber a part:1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Deforming tab.
3. In the Cambering field, define the degree of camber.
4. Click Modify.
See also Cambering parts (p. 115)
Shortening and lengthening parts
Use the shortening functionality to make the drawing of a part longer or shorter than the part inthe model. This can be useful for adding length to concrete precast parts in the cast conditionwhile the model stays in the erected state. The most common use for this is to account forprestressing elastic shortening, where the part actually shrinks a fraction of an inch after castingand after the strands are cut.
When drawings are created, Tekla Structures decreases the true length of the part by the valuedefined in the Shortening field. Shortening is applied linearly along the length in drawings.
Shortening affects the dimensions of the part and dimensions to objects inside the part.Shortening does not affect the geometry of the actual objects inside the part, including thetemplate output.
The cambering functionality is available only in the Full and PrecastConcrete Detailing configurations.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 116/260
116 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
See also Fine-tuning part shape (p. 104)
Shortening a part in drawings (p. 116)
Lengthening a part in drawings (p. 116)
Shortening a part in drawingsTo shorten a part in drawings:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Deforming tab.
3. In the Shortening field, define the degree of shortening.
4. Click Modify.
See also Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 115)
Lengthening a part in drawingsTo have a concrete part lengthened in cast unit drawings, you must enter a negative value forshortening in the part properties dialog box.
To lengthen a part in drawings:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Go to the Deforming tab.
3. In the Shortening field, enter a negative value.
For example, -20 would result in a part that is cast 20 units longer than the part in the
model.
4. Click Modify.
See also Shortening and lengthening parts (p. 115)
4.6 Combining parts
You can combine existing parts in Tekla Structures. This can be useful when you want to modelcomplex parts (such as folded plates) that are otherwise difficult to model, or when you want to
model prefabricated parts that are delivered to the workshop already attached to profiles.When you select the parts you want to combine, the part properties of the part that is selectedfirst are used for the combined part.
You can add the new combined part to another combined part. Cuts and fittings can also beapplied to combined parts.
See also Combining two parts into one (p. 116)
Attaching a part to another part (p. 117)
Combining two parts into one
To combine two parts into one:
The shortening functionality is available only in the Full and PrecastConcrete Detailing configurations.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 117/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 117
Detailing Structures
1. Click Edit > Combine.
2. Select the first part.
3. Select the second part.
If the centerlines of the part are not in line with each other, the centerlines are combined bytaking the largest distance between the start and end points from both parts.
See also Combining parts (p. 116)
Attaching a part to another part
To attach a part to another part:
1. Click Detailing > Attach Part.
2. Select the part to attach to.
3. Select the part you want to attach.
See also Combining parts (p. 116)
4.7 Splitting parts
You can split a part into two parts in Tekla Structures.
You can use splitting with straight parts, curved beams without offsets, or normal and taperedreinforcing bar groups. You can also split plates and slabs by using a polygon. You cannot splitpolybeams.
Combining does not work for contour plates or polybeams.
When you combine parts, Tekla Structures retains the attached objectsand connections. Tekla Structures does not recreate connections in the
part that was selected first.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 118/260
118 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Detailing Structures
See also Splitting a straight or curved part (p. 118)
Splitting a plate or slab (p. 118)
Splitting a straight or curved part
To split a straight or curved part:
1. Click Edit > Split.
2. Select the part you want to split.
3. Pick a point for the dividing line.
See also Splitting parts (p. 117)
Splitting a plate or slab
To split a plate or slab by using a polygon:
1. Click Edit > Split.
2. Select the part you want to split.
3. Pick positions to outline the polygon to be used for splitting.
4. Click the middle mouse button to close the polygon and to split the part.
See also Splitting parts (p. 117)
When you pick the corner points of the polygon to be used for splitting,make sure the starting and end points are:
• outside of the part, and
• on the same side of the part.
If you split contour plates that have bolts, welds or surface treatments,check the result after splitting.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 119/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 119
Examining the Model
5 Examining the Model
This section describes a variety of tools you can use to view your model and ensure it does notcontain errors
Contents • Viewing the model (p. 119)
• Inquiring the model (p. 126)
• Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)
• Visualizing project status (p. 135)
• Checking the model (p. 142)
5.1 Viewing the model
To see your Tekla Structures model from virtually any angle, you can move and rotate themodel.
See also Zooming the model (p. 119)
Rotating the model (p. 121)
Moving the model (p. 122)
Flying through the model (p. 123)
Creating a clip plane (p. 124)Creating a screenshot (p. 124)
Zooming the model
The commands on the View > Zoom menu allow you to focus in on a particular area, or pull outfor a wider view. You can use a mouse, keyboard shortcuts, or a combination of both.
To zoom in or out in a model:
• Scroll with the mouse wheel.
Scroll forward to zoom in, and backward to zoom out.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 120/260
120 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
See also Viewing the model (p. 119)
Modifying the zoom settings (p. 120)
Zooming with keyboard shortcuts (p. 120)
Zooming with Magnifier (p. 120)
Modifying the zoom settingsTo modify zoom settings, do any of the following:
See also Zooming the model (p. 119)
Zooming with keyboard shortcutsTo zoom by using keyboard shortcuts:
1. Place the mouse pointer over the model.
2. Do one of the following:
• To zoom in, press Page Up.
• To zoom out, press Page Down.
See also Zooming the model (p. 119)
Zooming with Magnifier The Magnifier tool is useful when you need to keep a general view of the model open, andexamine particular areas in detail at the same time. Magnifier works only in wire frame views.
To zoom by using Magnifier:
1. Open a wire frame view of the model.
2. Create a zoom window.
a Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.
b In the View type list box, select Wire frame.
c Click Modify.
d Click View > Zoom > Create Zoom Window.
If you do not have a wheel mouse, use the commands on the View >
Zoom menu to zoom in or out in the model. For more information oneach command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
To Do this
Keep the center point of the view inthe middle of the view window
Click Tools > Options > Centered Zooms.
If this option is off, the mouse pointer positiondetermines the center point of zooming.
Define the zoom ratio when using a3-button mouse
Use the advanced optionXS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO.
Define the zoom ratio when scrolling Use the advanced optionXS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_MOUSEWHEEL_MODE.
Define the zoom ratio when scrollingand holding down the wheel
Use the advanced optionXS_ZOOM_STEP_RATIO_IN_SCROLL_MODE.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 121/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 121
Examining the Model
e Click a starting corner for the zoom window, and then drag the pointer to size thewindow.
3. Click the Magnifier icon.
As you move the pointer in the general view, the zoom window displays the area aroundthe pointer in detail.
4. To change the level of magnification, zoom in and out in the zoom window.
See also Zooming the model (p. 119)
Rotating the model
You can use the mouse, keyboard shortcuts, menu commands, or a combination of thesetechniques to rotate the model in rendered views. In wire frame views, only menu commandsand keyboard shortcuts can be used to rotate the model.
To rotate the model, use any of the following methods:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 122/260
122 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
See also Rotation settings (p. 213)
Viewing the model (p. 119)
Moving the model
To move the entire model, use any of the following methods:
To Do this
Rotate using the middle mousebutton
1. Hold down the Ctrl key and click and drag with themiddle mouse button to rotate the model.
2. To relocate the center of rotation, press v, and then
pick a position in the view.
Tekla Structures rotates the model around this viewpoint.
Rotate using the left mousebutton
1. Press Ctrl + R.
2. Pick a position in the view.
Tekla Structures rotates the model around this viewpoint.
3. Click and drag with the left mouse button to rotatethe model.
Rotate using menu commands orkeyboard shortcuts
• Click View > Rotate and select one of the
commands.
The center of rotation is fixed in the center of thework area.
For more information on each command, see thecorresponding menu tooltip.
Automatically set the rotationcenter
1. Click Tools > Options > Automatic Rotation
Center to switch on automatic rotation centering.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and click and drag with themiddle mouse button to rotate the model.
The rotation center is automatically set at thelocation you clicked.
Tip: When Automatic Rotation Center is switched
off, you can temporarily activate it by holdingdown Ctrl + Shift while you click and drag withthe middle mouse button.
Define a specific rotation angle 1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Type a rotation angle in the Rotation around Z orRotation around X field.
3. Click Modify.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 123/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 123
Examining the Model
See also Viewing the model (p. 119)
Flying through the model
Using the Fly command, you can travel through a model, changing direction and varying thespeed as you go. You can also adjust the field of view setting, which can be useful when flyingin a tight space.
To fly through a model:1. Set view projection to Perspective.
a Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.
b In the Projection list box, select Perspective.
c Click Modify.
2. Optional: Adjust the field of view setting.
a Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Model View.
b Modify the advanced option XS_RENDERED_FIELD_OF_VIEW.
c Click OK.
3. Click View > Fly.
4. Select a view. The mouse pointer changes into an arrow and a cross. The arrow indicatesthe current flying direction.
5. Drag the mouse to move around in the model.
• To change the flying direction, drag the mouse in the desired direction.
The flying speed grows exponentially when you are approaching the model from adistance.
• To move up or down, hold down Ctrl and drag the mouse forward or backward.
• To change the camera angle, scroll with the mouse wheel.
To Do this
Move the model using the middlemouse button
1. To activate the middle button pan, click Tools >
Options > Middle Button Pan, or Shift+M. Acheckmark appears next to the menu option if the
middle button pan is already active.2. Hold down the middle mouse button and drag the
model anywhere within the view window.
Move the model using the Pan command
1. Press P or click View > Move > Pan to activatedynamic panning,
The mouse pointer changes to a hand.
2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag themouse anywhere within the view window.
3. To stop panning, press Esc.
Move the model using keyboardshortcuts or menu commands
Do one of the following:
• Use the up, down, left and right arrows on the
keyboard.• Click View > Move and then select one of the
commands.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 124/260
124 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
• To fly in the in the direction of the camera angle, hold down Shift and scroll
forward or backward.
6. To stop flying, press Esc.
See also XS_RENDERED_FIELD_OF_VIEW
Viewing the model (p. 119)
Creating a clip plane
Clip planes enable you to focus in on the required detail in the model. You can create up to sixclip planes in any rendered model view.
To create a clip plane:
1. Click View > Create Clip Plane.
2. Select a plane. The clip plane symbol appears in the model:
3. Repeat step 2 to create as many clip planes as needed.
4. To finish creating clip planes, press Esc.
5. To move a clip plane, click the clip plane symbol and drag it to a new location.
6. To delete a clip plane, click the clip plane symbol and press Delete.
See also Viewing the model (p. 119)
Creating a screenshot
A screenshot is a picture of a dialog box, view, or the entire Tekla Structures window. You canuse screenshots in posters, brochures, or other material to show projects carried out using TeklaStructures.
To create a high resolution screenshot of a rendered view:
1. Ensure that the view type is set to Rendered.2. Click Tools > Screenshot > Custom...
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 125/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 125
Examining the Model
3. To define which view to create the screenshot from, click Pick view and select a view.
4. Under Capture, select Rendered view.
5. Click Options... The Screenshot Options dialog box appears.
6. Set the desired properties and click OK.
7. Click Capture.
See also Creating a screenshot in Windows Vista (p. 125)
Screenshot settings (p. 214)
Creating a screenshot in Windows VistaDue to a performance problem in Windows Vista, the screenshot commands might not alwayswork properly. Use any of the following workarounds to solve this problem:
• Use the command Tools > Screenshot > Custom...
• Adjust the visual effects for best performance in the Performance Options dialog boxin Windows Vista.
• Use the built-in Snipping Tool in Windows Vista to capture screenshots.
See also Creating a screenshot (p. 124)
Saving a screenshot in bitmap formatBy default, screenshots are created as Portable Network Graphics (.png) files. You can alsosave a screenshot in bitmap (.bmp) format to use it, for example, as a custom componentthumbnail.
To save a screenshot in bitmap format:
1. Click Tools > Screenshot > Custom...
2. Select Place on clipboard.
3. Click Capture.
4. Paste the screenshot in your graphics editor and save it in .bmp format.
See also Creating a screenshot (p. 124)
Printing a screenshotYou can have Tekla Structures automatically print out a screenshot using the default printer.
To print a screenshot:
1. Click Tools > Screenshot > Print Screenshot to activate automatic printing.
2. Click Tools > Screenshot and select one of the commands:
• To capture the entire Tekla Structures window, select Main Frame.
• To capture the last dialog box displayed, select Dialog.
• To capture the active view, select View.
• To capture the active view without borders, select View without Borders.
See also Creating a screenshot (p. 124)
The software that you use to open the screenshot may have a limit for thenumber of pixels.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 126/260
126 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
5.2 Inquiring the model
Use the commands on the Tools > Inquire menu to display information about model objectsand model size.
See also Inquiring object properties (p. 126)Using the Custom Inquiry tool (p. 126)
Inquiring object properties
Use the Inquire object command to display the properties of a particular object, or a group of objects, within the model.
To inquire object properties:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Object.
2. Select an object.
Tekla Structures displays the object properties in a separate window.
See also Inquiring the model (p. 126)
Object property report templates (p. 126)
Object property report templatesWhen you view object properties using the Inquire object command, Tekla Structures uses thefollowing report templates:
You can modify these templates according to your needs. For more information on how to usetemplates, see the Template Editor user documentation.
See also Inquiring object properties (p. 126)
Using the Custom Inquiry toolUse the Custom Inquiry tool to display information of the selected model object in a separatewindow that you can drag and drop to any position on the screen. By default, the tool shows thetotal area, weight, and length of the selected model object.
To display object properties using the Custom Inquiry tool:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Custom Inquiry....
The Custom Inquiry dialog box appears.
2. Select a part.
Tekla Structures displays the part properties in the tool window.
See also Inquiring the model (p. 126)
Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry tool (p. 127)
Part type Template
Parts TS_Report_Inquire_Part.rpt
Assemblies TS_Report_Inquire_Assembly.rpt
Cast units TS_Report_Inquire_Cast_Unit.rpt
Welds TS_Report_Inquire_Welding.rpt
Reference models TS_Report_Inquire_Reference.rpt
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 127/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 127
Examining the Model
Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool (p. 127)
Modifying the contents of Custom Inquiry toolYou can define what information is displayed in the Custom Inquiry dialog box.
To modify the contents of the tool window:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Custom Inquiry....The Custom Inquiry dialog box appears.
2. Click Manage contents...
The Manage Contents dialog box appears. The Attributes list contains all of theavailable attributes. The Contents of Custom Inquiry list contains the attributes that aredisplayed in the tool window.
3. Optional: Define which attributes are shown in the Attributes list.
• To modify the default attributes, edit the InquiryTool.config file in the
..\Tekla
Structures\<version>\environments\common\macros\modelin
g\InquiryToolAttributes folder.
• To create new calculated attributes, click Add…. You can use standardmathematical symbols (+, -, *, and /) to form equations.
• To modify the calculated attributes, click Edit....
4. Define which attributes are shown in the tool window.
• To add more attributes to the tool window, click an item in the Attributes list and
then click the right arrow button.
• To remove attributes from the tool window, click an item in the Contents of
Custom Inquiry list and then click the left arrow button.
• To change the order of the attributes, use the Up and Down buttons.
• To change the formula of an attribute, click the down arrow and select a different
formula (SUM, AVERAGE, MAX, or MIN) from the list box.
See also Using the Custom Inquiry tool (p. 126)
Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool (p. 127)
Adding attributes to Custom Inquiry tool
Use the InquiryTool.config file to control which attributes are shown as defaultattributes in the Manage Contents dialog box in the Custom Inquiry tool. By default, the filecontains 65 attributes. The attributes refer to the contentattributes_global.lst filelocated in the ..\Tekla Structures\<version>\nt\TplEd\settings folder.
To add new attributes to the InquiryTool.config file:
1. Open the InquiryTool.config file in any standard text editor.
The file is located in the ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\common\macros\modeling\I
nquiryToolAttributes folder.
2. Copy the entire contents of [ATTR_CONTENT_??] to the end of the file.
3. Change the position number of the new attribute.
For example, change [ATTR_CONTENT_??] to [ATTR_CONTENT_66].
This section is for advanced users.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 128/260
128 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
4. Modify the NAME, DISPLAY_NAME, DATATYPE, UNIT, and DECIMAL values of the newattribute. Use the attribute names and definitions that are included in thecontentattributes_global.lst file.
5. Change the TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT value to reflect the total number of attributes in thefile.
For example, change TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT=65 to TOTAL_ATTR_CONTENT=66.
6. Save the file.
See also Using the Custom Inquiry tool (p. 126)
5.3 Showing and hiding objects
The visibility of objects in a view depends on the following settings:
• work area
• view depth
• view settings
• view filter
• object representation settings
Work area and view depth are like two virtual boxes. Objects that have their reference linepartially or totally inside both boxes are visible. Newly created objects are also visible outsidethe view depth but never outside the work area. When you redraw a view, only the objectsinside the view depth are displayed.
See also Defining which objects are displayed (p. 128)
Representation options (p. 128)
Hiding selected parts (p. 130)
Hiding unselected parts (p. 131)
Showing parts with exact lines (p. 131)
Showing and hiding assemblies (p. 131)
Showing and hiding components (p. 132)
Object groups (p. 132)
Object representation settings (p. 133)
Defining which objects are disp layed
To define which objects are visible and how they are displayed in a view:1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Click Display... to open the Display dialog box.
3. Select or clear check boxes to specify which objects are visible in the view.
See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)
Display settings (p. 216)
Representation options
In rendered views, you can define separately how Tekla Structures displays parts and
component objects. The following options are available:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 129/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 129
Examining the Model
Option Description Example
Wireframe Part outlines are displayed,surfaces are not, i.e. parts aretransparent.
In this example, component objectsare displayed as Rendered.
Shaded
Wireframe
Part outlines are displayed.Parts are transparent, and their
surfaces are shaded.
In this example, component objectsare displayed as Rendered.
Hidden Lines Parts are not transparent, i.e.underlying parts are not visible.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 130/260
130 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)
Hiding selected parts
You can quickly hide selected parts in a view. This can be useful, for example, when you wantto temporarily hide parts in order to see the parts behind them.
To hide selected parts:
1. Click View > Hide Part.
2. Select the parts you want to hide. The parts are shown as sticks.
3. To make the parts visible again, do one of the following:
• Click View > Redraw All.
• Right-click the parts and select Show with Exact Lines.
See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)
Hiding unselected parts (p. 131)
Rendered Part surfaces are displayed, i.e.parts are not transparent.
Show Only
Selected
Selected parts are displayed.Other parts are almostcompletely transparent.
This option is useful, forexample, when viewing clash
check results in a large model.
Use the shortcuts Ctrl+1...5 and Shift+1...5 to set the desiredrepresentation for parts in the model and components.
Option Description Example
To completely hide the parts, hold down the Shift key when selecting thecommand and the parts.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 131/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 131
Examining the Model
Hiding unselected parts
To hide all unselected parts in a view:
1. Select the parts that you want to keep visible.
2. Right-click and select Show Only Selected. The unselected parts become almosttransparent.
3. To make the parts visible again, do one of the following:
• Click View > Redraw All.
• Right-click the parts and select Show with Exact Lines.
See alsoShowing and hiding objects (p. 128)Hiding selected parts (p. 130)
Showing parts wi th exact lines
Use the Show Part with Exact Lines command to temporarily display a part with exact lineseven if you are using the Fast representation option for parts.
To display a part with exact lines:
1. Select the part.
2. Click View > Representation > Short Part with Exact Lines.
3. Click the view in which you want to display exact lines.
4. To clear the exact lines effect, click View > Redraw All.
See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)
Showing and hiding assemblies
Do any of the following:
To completely hide the unselected parts, hold down the Shift key whenselecting the command.
To show the unselected parts as sticks, hold down the Ctrl key whenselecting the command.
To Do this
Display the contents of an
assembly
• Right-click the assembly and select Assembly >
Show Assembly from the pop-up menu.
Tekla Structures displays all parts, bolts, welds, cuts,fittings, and other details belonging to the assembly,even if you had defined them as hidden in the viewproperties.
Hide an assembly 1. Select the assembly you want to hide.
2. Right-click and select Assembly > Hide from thepop-up menu.
Make a hidden assemblyvisible again
Do one of the following:
• Right-click and select Redraw View.
• Click View > Redraw All.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 132/260
132 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)
Refreshing views (p. 39)
Showing and hiding components
Do any of the following:
See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)
Refreshing views (p. 39)
Object groups
Object groups are sets of rules that can be used to group objects based on selected properties
and conditions.Use object groups to control the transparency and coloring of model objects. Object groups arealso used in project status visualizations.
See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)
Creating an object group (p. 132)
Copying an object group to another model (p. 133)
Deleting an object group (p. 133)
Visualizing project status (p. 135)
Creating an object groupTo create an object group:
1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation... to open the Object
Representation dialog box.
2. Click Object group... to open the Object Group - Representation dialog box.
3. Modify the object group settings.
a Click Add row.
b Select options from the Category, Property, and Condition list boxes.
c In the Value list box, type a value or select one from the model.
d Add more rows, and use the And/Or options or parentheses to create morecomplex rules.
4. Select the check boxes next to all object group rules that you want to enable.
The check boxes define which rules are enabled and effective.
To Do this
Display the contents of acomponent
• Click View > Representation > Show Component
Content and select a component.
Tekla Structures displays all bolts, welds, and otherdetails belonging to the component, even if you haddefined them as hidden in the view properties.
Hide a component 1. Select the component you want to hide.
2. Right-click and select Hide from the pop-up menu.
Make a hidden componentvisible again
Do one of the following:
• Right-click and select Redraw View.
• Click View > Redraw All.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 133/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 133
Examining the Model
5. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button.
6. Click Save as to save the object group.
See also Object groups (p. 132)
Selecting values from the model (p. 238)
Copying an object group to another modelTo copy an object group to another model:
1. Select the object group you want to copy.
The object groups you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, andthey have the file name extension *.PObjGrp.
2. Select where you want to copy the object group.
• To make an object group available in another model, copy the file to the
attributes folder of the destination model.
• To make an object group available in all models, copy the file to the system
folder.
3. Restart Tekla Structures.
See also Object groups (p. 132)
Deleting an object groupTo delete an object group:
1. Delete the object group file located in the model’s attributes folder.
Object groups have the file name extension *.PObjGrp.
2. Restart Tekla Structures.
See also Object groups (p. 132)
Object representation settings
Use object representation settings to modify the color and transparency of objects in the modelview, and to create customized presentations of defined objects.
For example, the following images show the same model with different object representationsettings:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 134/260
134 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
See also Showing and hiding objects (p. 128)
Creating object representation settings (p. 134)
Copying object representation settings to another model (p. 135)
Deleting object representation settings (p. 135)
Creating object representation settingsCreate object representation settings to define the color and transparency of objects in a model.
To create object representation settings:
1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation...
2. Click Add row.
3. Select a predefined object group from the Object group list box.
4. Use the Color list box to define the color of the objects in the object group.
5. Use the Transparency list box to define the transparency of the objects in the objectgroup.
6. Repeat steps 3–5 for each row you add.
7. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to change the order of the rows.
If an object belongs to several object groups, the coloring and visibility of the objectsdefined on the top row is applied to that object.
8. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button
9. Click Save as to save the set of object representation settings.
Standard object representation
Only parts whose profile name starts with IPE* or HEA* are visible
Objects whose user-defined attribute Planned erection date is set to01/05/2009
are displayed in blue, while all other parts are 90%transparent
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 135/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 135
Examining the Model
See also Object representation settings (p. 133)
Color settings (p. 213)
Transparency settings (p. 214)
Copying object representation settings to another modelTo copy object representation settings to another model:
1. Select the object representation settings you want to copy.
The settings you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, and theyhave the file name extension *.rep.
2. Select where you want to copy the settings.
• To make the settings available in another model, copy them to the attributes
folder of the destination model.
• To make the settings available in all models, copy them to the system folder.
3. Restart Tekla Structures.
See also Object representation settings (p. 133)
Deleting object representation settingsTo delete object representation settings:
1. Delete the object representation file located in the model’s attributes folder.
Object representation settings have the file name extension *.rep.
2. Restart Tekla Structures.
See also Object representation settings (p. 133)
5.4 Visualizing project status
Use the Project Status Visualization tool to review the status of modeling objects in a specifictime frame. For example, use this tool to:
• display the erection schedule for groups of parts using different colors• identify the parts that are scheduled to be fabricated during a specific time period.
To create project status visualizations, you need to have predefined object representationsettings that include object groups based on date rules.
See also Creating a visualization (p. 136)
Copying visualization settings to another model (p. 136)
Deleting visualization settings (p. 136)
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project (p. 136)
If your object representation setting does not contain the group All, TeklaStructures adds that row to the bottom of the list when you click Modify,Apply, or OK.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 136/260
136 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
Creating a v isualization
To create a project status visualization:
1. Click Tools > Project Status Visualization... to open the Project Status Visualization dialog box.
2. Modify the visualization settings.
a In the Object representation list box, select one of the predefined objectrepresentation settings.
b Define a start and end date for the time scale slider.
c Define the length of the time step.
3. Select the Refresh view automatically check box.
4. Type a unique name in the field next to the Save as button.
5. Click Save as to save the visualization settings.
6. To view the visualization in the model, click the step buttons.
See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project (p. 136)
Copying visualization settings to another model
To copy project status visualization settings to another model:
1. Select the visualization settings you want to copy.
The settings you have created are located in the model’s attributes folder, and theyhave the file name extension *.4d.
2. Select where you want to copy the settings.
• To make the settings available in another model, copy them to the attributes
folder of the destination model.
• To make the settings available in all models, copy them to the system folder.
3. Include a copy of the object representation settings file (*.rep) and object group files(*.PObjGrp) in the attributes and system folders to ensure that all the files willwork correctly.
4. Restart Tekla Structures.
See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)
Deleting visualization settings
To delete project status visualization settings:
1. Delete the visualization file located in the model’s attributes folder.
Project status visualization settings have the file name extension *.4d.
2. Restart Tekla Structures.
See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule of a project
This section explains how to visualize erection schedules using the project status visualizationtool available in Tekla Structures.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 137/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 137
Examining the Model
In the following example, you will first define an erection schedule for parts using a specificuser-defined attribute. After that, you will create object groups to define which objects areshown in the model, and object representation settings to define how the objects are shown inthe model. Finally, you will visualize the erection schedule using the project statusvisualization tool.
See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)
Example: Defining an erection schedule (p. 137)
Example: Creating object groups (p. 137)
Creating object representation settings (p. 134)
Example: Creating visualization settings (p. 138)
Example: Visualizing the erection schedule (p. 139)
Example: Defining an erection scheduleIn this example, you will define an erection schedule for parts using the user-defined attributeErection Scheduled.
To define an erection schedule:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Click User-defined attributes...
3. On the Status tab, modify the value of the user-defined attribute Erection Scheduled.
4. Ensure that all the check boxes are cleared.
5. Select the Erection Scheduled check box.
6. Select all the parts for which you want to use the same erection date.
7. Click Modify.
8. Repeat steps 1–7 for each group of parts in your model.
See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)
Example: Creating object groups
In this example, you will create an object group to define which objects are shown in themodel.
To create the object group:
1. Click View > Representation > Object representation... to open the Object
Representation dialog box.
2. Click Object group... to open the Object Group - Representation dialog box.
3. Create an object group that includes all objects whose user-defined attribute Erection
Scheduled is earlier than or equal to the review date.
a In the Category list box, select Object.
b In the Property list box, select INSTALL_PLAN.
c In the Condition list box, select Earlier than or equal.
d In the Value list box, select Select date... The Select Date dialog box appears.e Select Review date and click OK.
To make it easier to select parts, create a separate selection filter for eachgroup of parts.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 138/260
138 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the group. For example,plan_same_or_before_review_date .
5. Click Save as.
See also Object groups (p. 132)
Visualizing project status (p. 135)
Example: Creating object representation settingsIn this example, you will create object representation settings to define how the objects areshown in the model.
To create object representation settings:
1. Click View > Representation > Object Representation... to open the Object
Representation dialog box.
2. Define the color and transparency settings for the object group that you created inExample: Creating object groups (p. 137).
a Click Add row.
b In the Object group list box, select the object group you just created.
c In the Color list box, select Color by class.
d In the Transparency list box, select Visible.
3. Define the color and transparency settings for the object group All.
a Click Add row.
b In the Object group list box, select the object group All.
c In the Color list box, select Color by class.
d In the Transparency list box, select Hidden.
4. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the object representation settings.For example, scheduled_erection_date .
5. Click Save as.
See also Object representation settings (p. 133)
Visualizing project status (p. 135)
Example: Creating visualization settingsIn this example, you will create project status visualization settings.
To create visualization settings:
1. Click Tools > Project Status Visualization... to open the Project Status Visualization dialog box.
2. Define the length of the time step.
3. Define a start and end date for the time scale slider.
4. In the Object representation list box, select the object representation setting youcreated in Example: Creating object representation settings (p. 138).
5. Select the Refresh view automatically check box.
6. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the visualization.
7. Click Save as to save the visualization settings.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 139/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 139
Examining the Model
See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)
Example: Visualizing the erection scheduleIn this example, you will visualize the erection schedule using the Project Status
Visualization tool.
To visualize the erection schedule:
1. Click Tools > Project Status Visualization... to open the Project Status Visualization dialog box.
2. In the list box next to the Load button, select the visualization setting you created inExample: Creating visualization settings (p. 138).
3. Click Load.
4. To view the visualization in the model, click the step buttons.
The images below show how the objects are shown when you change the review date:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 140/260
140 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
Review date Visualization
November 02
November 05
November 08
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 141/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 141
Examining the Model
November 11
November 14
Review date Visualization
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 142/260
142 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
See also Visualizing project status (p. 135)
5.5 Checking the model
When the model is complete, it is useful to check the model for errors.
See also Measuring objects (p. 143)
Detecting clashes (p. 144)
Comparing parts or assemblies (p. 149)
Finding distant objects (p. 149)
November 17
November 20
Review date Visualization
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 143/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 143
Examining the Model
Measuring objects
Use the Measure tool to measure angles, the distance between two points and between bolts.
All measurements are temporary. The measurements appear in the rendered view window untilyou update or redraw the window.
See also Measuring distances (p. 143)
Measuring angles (p. 143)
Measuring bolt spacing (p. 143)
Measuring distancesTo measure horizontal, vertical and user-defined distances:
1. Press Ctrl+P to switch to the plane view.
2. Click Tools > Measure and select a command that measures distances.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
3. Pick the starting point.
4. Pick the end point.5. Pick a point to indicate on which side of the dimension line you want the number to
appear.
See also Measuring objects (p. 143)
Measuring anglesTo measure angles:
1. Click or Tools > Measure > Angle.
2. Pick the center point.
3. Pick the starting point.4. Pick the end point.
See also Measuring objects (p. 143)
Measuring bolt spacingYou can measure distances between bolts in a bolt group. Tekla Structures also gives you theedge distances between the bolts and a selected part.
To measure bolt spacing:
1. Click or Tools > Measure > Bolt Spacing.
2. Select a bolt group.3. Select a part.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 144/260
144 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
See also Measuring objects (p. 143)
Detecting clashes
Use the Clash Check tool to find parts, bolts, or reference model objects that collide. Clashesof objects that only touch one another are not included in the clash check results.
The following reference model file types are supported in clash checking:
• IFC
• DWG
• DGN
See also Finding clashes in a model (p. 145)
Clash Check Manager (p. 145)
Defining a clash check clearance area for bolts (p. 148)
Reverting to the old clash checking functionality (p. 149)
If you want to use another Tekla Structures model as a reference model,you must export it in IFC format to be able to use it in clash checking.
If you are checking a reference model for clashes, ensure that all theparts of the reference model are selected.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 145/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 145
Examining the Model
Finding clashes in a modelTo find clashes in a model:
1. Select the objects you want to check.
2. Click Tools > Clash Check.
The clash check progress is displayed on the status bar. You can continue working
during the clash check.If colliding objects are found, Tekla Structures highlights them in yellow and displaysthe clash check log.
3. To locate the colliding objects, select a row in the clash check log.
Tekla Structures selects the corresponding objects in the model.
See also Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports (p. 241)
Clash Check Manager If you are using the Full or Construction Management configuration, you can also use Clash
Check Manager to detect and manage clashes in a model.
See also Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager (p. 146)
Managing the list of clashes (p. 146)
Symbols used in clash checking (p. 146)
Changing the status of clashes (p. 147)
Changing the priority of clashes (p. 147)
If you start clash checking while another clash check is still running, youcan choose whether to continue checking, restart the operation and check the currently selected parts, or stop checking.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 146/260
146 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
Opening and saving clash check sessions (p. 147)
Finding clashes using Clash Check Manager
To find clashes in a model:
1. Click Tools > Clash Check Manager.
2. In the model, select the objects you want to include in the clash check.
3. Click to check the objects.
You can continue working during the clash check. When the clash check is complete, thestatus bar message changes from Clash checking in progress to Ready.
When you re-run clash check, new clashes are appended to the end of the list.
4. To highlight a clash in the model, select a row in the list of clashes.
The clash is highlighted in the model and the related model objects are selected.
5. To zoom the active view so that the selected objects are shown in the center of the view,double-click a row.
See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)
Managing the list of clashes
To manage the list of clashes in Clash Check Manager:
See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)
Symbols used in clash checking
Clash Check Manager uses the following flags to indicate the state of clashes:
To Do this
Change the sort order of clashresults
Click the heading of the desired column to alternatebetween the ascending and descending sort order.
Select multiple rows in the list of clashes
Hold down Ctrl or Shift while selecting rows.
Show or hide a column 1. Right-click one of the colum headings to open apop-up menu.
2. Click any of the list items to show or hide them.
A check mark in front of the item indicates that
it is visible.
Flag State Description
(none) Active The default state. The clash is not new, modified,resolved, or missing.
New All clashes are marked as new when they arefound for the first time.
Modified If the object has been modified (for example, if theprofile has changed), the state changes to modifiedwhen you re-run clash check.
Only certain object properties affect this flag. Tosee which properties have an effect, right-click oneof the column headings. Both visible and hidden
properties affect the flag.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 147/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 147
Examining the Model
See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)
Changing the status of clashes
To change the status of clashes:
1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes whose status you want to change.
2. Right-click one of the selected rows to open a pop-up menu.
3. Select Status and then one of the status options:
• Assign
• Fix
• Approve
• Ignore
• Reopen
See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)
Changing the priority of clashes
To change the priority of clashes:
1. In Clash Check Manager, select the clashes whose priority you want to change.
2. Right-click one of the selected rows to open a pop-up menu.
3. Select Priority and then one of the status options:
• High
• Medium
• Low
See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)
Opening and saving clash check sessions
To open or save sessions in Clash Check Manager, do any of the following:
Resolved If the objects no longer clash, the state changes toresolved when you re-run clash check.
Missing If one or both of the clashing objects have beenremoved from the model, the state changes to
missing when you re-run clash check.
Flag State Description
To Do this
Open a session1. Click .
2. In the Open dialog box, select a session.
3. Click OK.
Create a new sessionClick .
Clash Check Manager clears the list of clasheswithout running clash check.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 148/260
148 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
See also Clash Check Manager (p. 145)
Defin ing a clash check c learance area for bol tsTo check if bolts collide with profiles and if there is enough space to fix the bolt, you can definea clash check clearance area for bolts.
To define a clearance area for bolts:
1. Click Tools > Options > Options...
2. In the Options dialog box, go to the Clash check page.
3. Modify the bolt clearance values.
If the fields are empty, Tekla Structures uses the default value 1.00.
4. Ensure that you have selected the check box in front of each field.
If you clear the check boxes, the clearance will be zero.
5. Click Apply or OK.
Save the active sessionClick .
Save the active session under adifferent name or in a different
location
1. Click the arrow button next to the icon.
A pop-up menu appears.
2. Click Save as.
3. In the Save As dialog box, browse to the folderwhere you want to save the session.
4. In the File name box, enter a new name.
5. Click Save.
By default, clash check sessions are stored as XML files in the..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\Clashes folder.Tekla Structures creates the folder automatically when you open Clash
Check Manager for the first time.
To Do this
d is the larger value of the bolt head or nut diameters
Clash check clearance area
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 149/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 149
Examining the Model
See also Detecting clashes (p. 144)
Reverting to the old clash checking functionalityIf you are working on a large model, running the clash check may sometimes be slow. In thatcase you can use the old clash checking functionality, which does not recognize clashes withreference models.
For more information on the old clash checking functionality, seeXS_USE_NEW_CLASH_CHECK andXS_CLASH_CHECK_BETWEEN_REFERENCES.
See also Detecting clashes (p. 144)
Comparing parts or assemblies
To compare two parts or assemblies:
1. Select the objects you want to compare.
• To compare parts, select two parts in the model.
• To compare assemblies, select a part in each assembly.
2. Click Tools > Compare, and then select either Parts or Assemblies.
Tekla Structures displays the results on the status bar.
See also Checking the model (p. 142)
Finding distant objects
When the work area is huge, the model may contain some distant objects that are not easy tofind. Use the Find Distant Objects command to find these objects.
To find distant objects:
1. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model > Find Distant Objects.
Tekla Structures displays a list of object IDs.
2. Select an object in the list.
3. Right-click and select a command from the pop-up menu.
You can, for example, inquire or delete the object.
See also XS_DISTANT_OBJECT_FINDER_TOLERANCE
Checking the model (p. 142)
If Tekla Structures cannot find the bolt head or nut diameter in the boltcatalog, it uses the shank diameter instead.
You cannot use this command to find parts (such as beams, columns orplates).
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 150/260
150 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Examining the Model
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 151/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 151
Numbering the Model
6 Numbering the Model
This section explains how to change numbering settings and apply numbering in TeklaStructures.
Contents • What is numbering (p. 151)
• What affects numbering (p. 152)
• Numbering objects (p. 156)
• Defining numbering series (p. 153)
• Viewing the numbering history (p. 161)
6.1 What is numbering
Tekla Structures assigns a mark to each part and assembly in a model. The mark includes partor assembly prefix and position number, and other elements (such as profile or material grade).This process is called numbering . Part numbers are vital in the fabrication, shipping, anderection stages of construction.
Tekla Structures also uses numbers to identify parts, cast units, and assemblies when producingdrawings and reports, and exporting models. You must have Tekla Structures number the modelbefore you can create single-part, assembly, cast unit, and multi-drawings, or export files froma model.
Tekla Structures uses part numbers in many tasks, for example to:
• connect a drawing with the right part, cast unit, or assembly
• report the properties of identical parts, cast units, and assemblies
• identify part information when exporting parts to another software.
If the numbering of a part or assembly is not up to date, a question mark (?) is displayed in thepart label and in the Inquire Object dialog box. For example:
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 152/260
152 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Numbering the Model
What affects numbering (p. 152)
Inquiring object properties (p. 126)
6.2 What affects numberingTekla Structures treats objects as different, and therefore numbers them differently, if thefollowing properties differ:
• Beam orientation
• Column orientation
• Reinforcement
• Cast-in embeds
• Surface treatment (affects only assemblies)
• Pop marks
• Shortening• User-defined attributes
To define which properties affect numbering in your model, modify the settings in theNumbering Setup dialog box. For example, if two otherwise identical concrete parts havedifferent names and you select the Part name check box, Tekla Structures gives the partsdifferent numbers.
By default, a part retains its number, as long as only one part has that particular number,regardless of the settings in the Numbering Setup dialog box.
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Numbering settings (p. 233)
Identical parts (p. 152)
Identical reinforcements (p. 153)
User-defined attributes in numbering (p. 153)
Identical parts
Tekla Structures gives parts the same number if the parts are identical in the fabrication orcasting. If a part is deformed after fabrication or casting (for example if the part is cambered,shortened, or warped), the final geometry on site and in the model may be different.
Tekla Structures treats parts as identical and gives them the same number if the following basicpart properties are the same:
• Part geometry
• Numbering series
• Profile
• Material
• Finish
Always carry out full numbering on the model after you have changedthe numbering settings.
If the Renumber all option is selected in the Numbering Setup dialogbox, Tekla Structures will always carry out full renumbering.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 153/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 153
Numbering the Model
You can set the degree of tolerance for part geometry in the Numbering Setup dialog box. If the geometry of parts differs within this degree of tolerance, Tekla Structures treats the parts asidentical for numbering purposes.
Class and phase do not affect numbering. Tekla Structures gives the same number to identicalparts that belong to different classes or phases.
See also What affects numbering (p. 152)Parts (p. 51)
Phases (p. 171)
Identical reinforcements
Tekla Structures treats reinforcing bars as identical, and gives them the same number, if thefollowing properties are the same:
• Bar geometry
• Numbering series
• Size• Grade
• Bending radius
Tekla Structures uses the values of the rebar_config.inp file located in the ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\environments\<environment>\system\ folder toround bar dimensions up or down. For example, if you set the rounding accuracy for bardimensions to 5 and the rounding direction to up, Tekla Structures rounds all bar dimensions upto the nearest 5 mm. In that case, two bars with dimensions of 131 mm and 133 mm would bothround up to 135 mm. This gives them identical bar geometry.
Class does not affect numbering. Tekla Structures gives the same number to identicalreinforcing bars that belong to different classes.
See also What affects numbering (p. 152)
Reinforcement
User-defined attributes in numbering
Tekla Structures treats parts and reinforcing bars as different, and therefore numbers themdifferently, if the values of a user-defined attribute differ.
Parts If a user-defined attribute has the variable special_flag set to yes, Tekla Structures takesthis user-defined attribute into account when numbering parts.
Reinforcements If a user-defined attribute has the variable consider_in_numbering set to yes, Tekla
Structures takes this user-defined attribute into account when numbering reinforcements.
See also What affects numbering (p. 152)
User-defined attributes (p. 55)
6.3 Defining numbering series
You can use a numbering series to divide steel parts, cast units, and assemblies into groups. Forexample, you can allocate a separate numbering series to different phases or part types.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 154/260
154 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Numbering the Model
The name of a numbering series consists of a prefix and a start number . You do not have todefine a part prefix (for example, you may want to omit the part prefix for minor parts).
When you run numbering, Tekla Structures compares parts that belong to the same series witheach other. All identical parts in the same numbering series are given the same part number.
Example For example, if you define a numbering series with the prefix P and start number 1001, TeklaStructures numbers that series P1001, P1002, P1003, ...
See also Planning your numbering series (p. 154)
Assigning a numbering series to a part (p. 154)
Family numbers (p. 155)
Overlapping numbering series (p. 156)
Planning your numbering series
Before you start modeling, it is good idea to plan the numbering prefixes and start numbers youwill use for the entire project. Careful planning prevents numbering conflicts.
To save time, include the numbering series in the default part properties for each type of partbefore you start modeling.
You may want to omit the part prefix for minor parts, such as plates. If you do this, ensure thatyou assign a Start number for that numbering series so that it will not overlap other parts.
Example One way to plan the numbering series is to create a table:
See also Defining numbering series (p. 153)
Overlapping numbering series (p. 156)
Assigning a numbering series to a part
You can assign a numbering series to any part or assembly.
To assign a numbering series to a part:
Concrete parts are numbered according to the cast unit numberingsettings. For example, if the cast unit prefix is C and the start number is1, concrete parts will get the part prefix Concrete_C-1.
This applies also to concrete components whose part position prefix isConcrete and start number is 1.
Part type
Part
Prefix
Part
Startnumber
Assembly
Prefix
Assembly
Start number
Beam PB 1 AB 1
Vertical brace PVB 1 AVB 1
Horizontal brace PHB 1 AHB 1
Rafter PR 1 AR 1
Purlin PP 1 AP 1
Column PC 1 AC 1
Plate 1001 A 1
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 155/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 155
Numbering the Model
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. If you are modifying the properties of a concrete part, go to the Cast unit tab.
3. Under Numbering series, define a part prefix and a start number.
4. Click Modify.
See also Defining numbering series (p. 153)
Family numbers
With family numbering you can group objects within the same numbering series into different“families”. This can be used, for example, to find similar cast units that can be cast in the samebed.
When you use family numbering, the cast unit position numbers consist of a family number and a qualifier . For example:
Assemblies and cast units that match the comparison criteria you define in the Numbering
Setup dialog box get the same family number. However, if they have the same family numberbut different part geometry or materials, they get unique qualifier numbers.
See also Defining numbering series (p. 153)
Assigning family numbers (p. 155)
Changing the family number of an object (p. 156)
Example: Using family numbers (p. 163)
Assigning family numbersTo assign family numbers to numbering series:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open theNumbering Setup dialog box.
2. Go to the Family numbering tab.
3. Define which numbering series to assign family numbers to.
a Click Add series to open the Add series dialog box.
Tekla Structures displays all the assembly and cast unit numbering series in themodel.
b Select a numbering series from the list, and then click Add.
The numbering series appears in the family numbering list.
4. Under Compare, select the properties that need to be identical for the members of thesame family.
Define comparison criteria for each numbering series separately.
Family number
Qualifier
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 156/260
156 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Numbering the Model
Select at least one check box, but not all of them. If you select all the check boxes, thefamily number will be the same as the normal assembly position, and the qualifiernumber will be 1 for all. If you do not select any check boxes, only one family numberper series is assigned.
5. Click Apply.
Tekla Structures stores the settings in the numbering database file
(<model_name>.db2) in the current model folder the next time you save the model.
6. If you are assigning family numbers to parts that have already been numbered, clear theexisting numbers.
7. Update numbering in the model.
Tekla Structures assigns a family number to all objects in the numbering series.
See also Family numbers (p. 155)
Clearing numbers (p. 160)
Changing the family number of an objectTo change the family number and/or family qualifier of an object:
1. Select the objects whose family numbers you want to change.2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Change Number > Family Number...
3. In the Assign Family Number dialog box, type the desired values in the Family number and Family qualifier fields.
4. Click Assign.
See also Family numbers (p. 155)
Overlapping numbering series
When you plan numbering, ensure that you reserve enough numbers for each series. If a seriesoverlaps another, Tekla Structures might allocate the same number to different parts.
Tekla Structures warns you about series overlaps. View the numbering history log to check which numbers overlap.
See also Defining numbering series (p. 153)
Viewing the numbering history (p. 161)
6.4 Numbering objects
To number objects in a model:1. Optional: Modify the numbering settings.
a Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open theNumbering Setup dialog box.
b Modify the settings.
c Click Apply or OK.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering and select one of the following commands:
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 157/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 157
Numbering the Model
See also Numbering settings (p. 233)
Numbering assemblies and cast units (p. 157)
Numbering reinforcements (p. 157)
Saving preliminary numbers (p. 158)
Control numbers (p. 158)
Changing numbers (p. 159)
Clearing numbers (p. 160)
Creating a standard-part model (p. 160)
Example: Numbering identical beams (p. 162)
Numbering assemblies and cast units
Part numbering does not affect cast unit and assembly numbering. However, Tekla Structuresnumbers assemblies and cast units in the same way as it does parts. The default start number is1. The prefix varies based on the part type.
Surface treatments affect the numbering of assemblies, if you select the Surface treatment check box in the Numbering Setup dialog box.
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Assembly position numbers (p. 157)
Assembly posi tion numbersUse the options in the Numbering Setup dialog box to sort the order in which assemblies aregiven their position numbers. Sorting by user-defined attributes or by location does not affectthe part position.
The sort order can be based on the following criteria:
• The x, y or z coordinates of the main part of the assembly
The sorting is based on the center of gravity of the reference axis.
• The user-defined attribute of an assembly or the main part
If your sorting is based on user-defined attributes, Tekla Structures displays a list box thatincludes all the available user-defined attributes.
See also Numbering assemblies and cast units (p. 157)
Numbering reinforcements
Part numbering and cast unit numbering do not affect the numbering of reinforcements.However, Tekla Structures numbers reinforcements in the same way as it does parts.
Assembly and cast unit numbering may affect part numbering, if theadvanced option XS_USE_ASSEMBLY_NUMBER_FOR is set.
If you add new parts, objects that have already been numbered are not renumbered to suit the sorting order by, for example, the x coordinate. Inthis case you should renumber the parts.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 158/260
158 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Numbering the Model
To force Tekla Structures to give otherwise identical concrete parts and cast units differentnumbers if they have different reinforcements, select the Reinforcing bars check box in theNumbering Setup dialog box.
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Saving preliminary numbers
A preliminary mark is a user-defined attribute that defines the part position number. You cansave the current part position numbers as preliminary marks for selected parts. The previouspreliminary numbers are overriden.
To save part position numbers for preliminary marks:
1. Select the parts.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Save Preliminary Numbers.
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Control numbersControl numbers are properties that identify the location of parts in a model. You can assignconsecutive control numbers to all the parts or only selected parts.
When you assign control numbers, you can specify in what order to assign control numbers,according to the location of each part on the global coordinate system. The options are:
• None
• X
• -X
• Z
•-Z
• Y
• -Y
With positive directions (such as X), the parts with the lowest coordinate value are numberedfirst. With negative directions (such as -X), the parts with the highest coordinate value arenumbered first.
For example, if First direction is -X, Second direction is Y, and Third direction is Z,numbering starts from the parts that have the highest x coordinate value. If multiple parts havethe same x coordinate, their y coordinates are also compared. If multiple parts have the same xand y coordinates, their z coordinates are also compared.
Example In the following example, the sort order is X Y Z.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 159/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 159
Numbering the Model
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Assigning control numbers to parts (p. 159)
Locking and unlocking control numbers (p. 159)
Assigning control numbers to parts
Before you start, number the model.
To assign control numbers to parts:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Assign Control Numbers... to open theCreate control numbers dialog box.
2. Indicate which parts to consider.
• To consider all parts in the model, do not select any parts.
• To only consider specific parts, select the parts.
3. In the Numbering list box, specify which parts get control numbers.
4. If you are assigning control numbers to parts in a specific numbering series, type theprefix and start number in the corresponding fields.
5. Define the control numbers to be used.
a In the Start number of control numbers field, type the first control number to beused.
b In the Step value field, define the interval.
For example, to assign the control numbers 2, 5, 8, 11, etc., type 2 in the Start
number of control numbers field and 3 in the Step value field.
6. In the Renumber list box, specify how to treat parts that already have control numbers.
7. Use the direction list boxes to specify in what order to assign control numbers.
8. Click Apply, and then click Create.
See also Control numbers (p. 158)
Control number settings (p. 235)
Locking and unlocking control numbersTo prevent Tekla Structures from renumbering the control numbers of all parts, or specificparts, use the Lock/Unlock Control Numbers command.
To lock or unlock control numbers:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Lock/Unlock Control Numbers to open theLock/Unlock control numbers (S10) dialog box.
2. Define which parts’ control numbers to lock or unlock.
• To lock or unlock the control numbers of all parts, do not select any parts in the
model.
• To lock or unlock the control numbers of specific parts, select the parts in the
model.
3. In the Status list box, select Lock or Unlock in the Status.
4. Click Apply, and then click Create.
See also Control numbers (p. 158)
Changing numbers
Use the Change Number command to change part, assembly, multi-position, or familynumbers after you run numbering. All objects with the same number will be given the numberyou specified. This command does not change the numbering series.
To change the position numbers:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 160/260
160 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Numbering the Model
1. Select an object.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Change Number and select one of thecommands.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
3. Set the desired properties. The options you have vary depending on your selection instep 2.
If the number you specified is already in use, Tekla Structures displays a warning anddoes not change the number.Tekla Structures also displays a warning if the positionnumber is higher than the highest current number. This is for information only and thenumber is still changed.
4. Click Assign.
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Clearing numbers
Use the Clear Numbers command to permanently delete the assigned position numbers of objects. Next time you run numbering, Tekla Structures assigns new numbers to the objects,irrespective of what their previous numbers were.
To clear the position numbers:
1. Select the objects whose numbers you want to clear.
2. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Clear Numbers and select one of thecommands.
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Creating a standard-part modelA standard-part model contains only standard parts with specific part prefixes. You can haveTekla Structures use these prefixes when numbering parts in another model.
To create a standard-part model:
1. Create a new model and give it a descriptive name.
This functionality only applies to steel parts.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 161/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 161
Numbering the Model
For example, StandardParts.
2. Create the objects you want to have as standard parts.
3. Explode all components.
4. Delete all unnecessary items.
5. Give the objects prefixes that are not used elsewhere (for example, STD1, STD2, and soon).
Ensure that the standard-part model does not contain duplicate prefixes.
6. Save the standard-part model.
7. Open another model.
8. Click Tools > Options > Advanced Options... > Numbering.
9. Check that the advanced option XS_STD_PART_MODEL is set, and that it points tothe correct standard-part model.
For example:
XS_STD_PART_MODEL=C:\Tekla StructuresModels\StandardParts
10. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to display theNumbering Setup dialog box.
11. If you have selected the Part name check box, ensure that the project model has the
same part names as the standard-part model.
12. Click Check for standard parts and Apply.
13. Number the model.
As Tekla Structures carries out the numbering, it compares all of the parts in the modelto the standard-part model. The numbering applies any part position numbers (only thepart prefix) found in the standard-part model to all identical parts found in the projectmodel.
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
6.5 Viewing the numbering historyTo view the numbering history:
• Click Tools > Display Log File > Numbering History....
Tekla Structures displays the numbering log file.
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
6.6 Repairing numbering errors
We recommend that you check and repair numbering in the model every now and then,especially before producing drawings or reports.
To check and repair numbering in a model:
1. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open theNumbering Setup dialog box.
For information on how to interpret the log file, see Numbering historylog.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 162/260
162 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Numbering the Model
2. Ensure that one of the following options is being used:
• Compare to old
• Keep number if possible
3. Click OK to save the changes.
4. Unless you want to repair the entire model, select the objects whose numbering you
want to repair.5. Click Tools > Diagnose & Repair Model and select one of the following commands:
• Diagnose & Repair Numbering: All
• Diagnose & Repair Numbering: Series of Selected Objects
For more information on each command, see the corresponding menu tooltip.
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Changing numbers (p. 159)
6.7 Numbering examples
This section gives some examples of numbering the model.
Contents Example: Numbering identical beams (p. 162)
Example: Using family numbers (p. 163)
Example: Numbering selected part types (p. 164)
Example: Numbering parts in selected phases (p. 164)
Example: Numbering settings during a project (p. 165)
Example: Numbering identical beams
This example explains how different numbering settings result in different part numbers whenyou modify a part.
To number identical beams:
1. Create three identical beams with the numbering series prefix P and start number 1.
2. Number the model. All the beams have the part position number P1.
3. Modify one of the beams.
4. Number the model. You should now have two beams P1 and one P2.
5. Change beam P2 to be identical to the others.
6. Number the model.
Tekla Structures assigns the position number of the oldest part orassembly to all identical parts, even if a newer part or assembly has asmaller position number.
To force a certain position number on a part or assembly, use the Change
Number command after repairing numbering in the model.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 163/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 163
Numbering the Model
Depending on the numbering settings in the Numbering Setup dialog box, TeklaStructures assigns one of the following part position numbers to the modified part:
• Compare to old: P1
• Keep number if possible: P2
• Take new number: P3
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Example: Using family numbers
In this example, the following four beams have the numbering series prefix B and the startnumber 1. The parts have the same main profile, and each pair has the same length, but theholes are different.
We use the following family numbering settings:
• Numbering series: B/1
• Compare: Main part profile and Overall length
With the given family numbering criteria, Tekla Structures divides the beams into two families.All beams have the same profile, but each pair has a different length. Within both families thebeams get different qualifiers because they have different holes.
• The first beam gets the assembly position number B/1-1
• The second beam gets the assembly position number B/1-2
• The third beam gets the assembly position number B/2-1
• The fourth beam gets the assembly position number B/2-2
See also Family numbers (p. 155)
Assembly position: B/1
Assembly position: B/2
Assembly position: B/3
Assembly position: B/4
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 164/260
164 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Numbering the Model
Example: Numbering selected part types
This example shows how different numbering settings can be used for different part types. Wewill use one set of numbering settings for steel anchor rods, and another one for steel columns.
To number anchor rods and columns:
1. Create steel columns.2. Create anchor rods with the numbering series prefix AR and start number 1.
Ensure that this numbering series is different to any other parts or assemblies in themodel.
3. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open theNumbering Setup dialog box.
4. Ensure that the Column orientation check box is not selected, and then click Apply.
5. Select one of the anchor rods in the model.
6. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.
All parts with the AR prefix and start number at 1 are numbered.
7. After the anchor rod numbering is complete, click Drawings & Reports > Numbering >
Number Series of Selected Objects.
8. Select the Column orientation check box, and then click Apply.
9. Select one of the steel columns in the model.
10. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.
All columns belonging to the same numbering series as the selected column arenumbered.
Example: Numbering parts in selected phases
This example shows how to number a model that consists of multiple phases, each phasehaving a different detailing and submittal schedule. This enables you to release drawings for aparticular phase at any time.
Before you start, divide the model into phases.
To number parts in selected phases:
1. Apply a specific numbering series prefix and start number for parts in each phase.
For example:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 165/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 165
Numbering the Model
• The beams in phase 1 get the numbering series prefix B and start number 1000.
• The beams in phase 2 get the numbering series prefix B and start number 2000.
2. Ensure that the numbering series are not overlapping.
For example, to avoid numbering overlaps with the beams in phase 2, phase 1 should notcontain more than 1000 position numbers.
3. Select the parts you want to number.
4. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Numbering Settings... to open theNumbering Setup dialog box.
5. Modify the numbering settings, and then click Apply.
6. Select one of the parts you want to number.
7. Click Drawings & Reports > Numbering > Number Series of Selected Objects.
All parts belonging to the same numbering series as the selected part are numbered.
See also Example: Numbering settings during a project (p. 165)
Example: Numbering settings during a project
You can use different numbering settings at different times in a project. For example:
Phase 1: green
Phase 2: magenta
Use selection filters to easily select parts belonging to a certain phase orparts with a specific start number series. You can also use selectionfilters to ignore specific phases that are already completed or phases thatare not ready for numbering.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 166/260
166 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Numbering the Model
• Before releasing a phase of the project for fabrication, you might use the Re-use old
numbers option for numbering the entire model.
• If a phase has already been released for fabrication in a project, you might use the Take
new number option for new and modified parts.
• If you are numbering other phases of the project at earlier stages of detailing, you might
use the Compare to old option and try to combine as many position numbers as possible.
See also Example: Numbering parts in selected phases (p. 164)
General numbering settings (p. 233)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 167/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 167
Advanced Modeling
7 Advanced Modeling
This section explains some advanced modeling techniques available in Tekla Structures.
Contents • Organizing the model (p. 167)
• Phases (p. 171)
• Sequences (p. 172)
• Lotting (p. 174)
• Parametric modeling (p. 176)
• Sketched cross sections (p. 181)
7.1 Organizing the model
Use the Model Organizer to manage and view different logical areas and object types in yourmodel. You can classify information according to your needs.
Model Organizer can be used in construction planning and management. You can divide alarge model into logical sections and floors to help create building schedules, lots, and erectionsequences, and categorize object types, for example, based on purchasing contracts. You cancategorize both native Tekla Structures objects and reference objects.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 168/260
168 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
See also Creating logical areas (p. 168)
Creating object type categories (p. 169)
Modifying logical areas and object type categories (p. 169)
Viewing logical areas and object type categories (p. 170)
Deleting logical areas and object type categories (p. 171)
Creating logical areas
Logical areas may already have been defined for the model. You can create new logical areas
for your own needs.
Model Organizer is included in the Full and Construction Managementconfigurations only.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 169/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 169
Advanced Modeling
To create logical areas using Model Organizer:
1. Click Tools > Model Organizer....
2. Create a path structure.
a Right-click Logical Areas.
b Click New Building.
c Click New Section.
d Click New Story.
You may create as many sections and storys as you need. Note that sections andstorys are both created under buildings.
3. Select a section or story in Model Organizer.
4. In the model, select the area for the section or the story.
Each model object can belong to only one section and one story.
5. In Model Organizer, right-click the selected section or story, and select Add Selected to
Category.
See also Organizing the model (p. 167)
Creating object type categories
Object types may already have been defined for the model. You can create new object typecategories for your own needs.
To create object type categories using Model Organizer:
1. Click Tools > Model Organizer....
2. Create object type categories.
a Right-click Object Types.
b Click New Object Type.
You can also create subtypes for object types.
3. In the model, select the objects you want to add to an object type category.
4. In Model Organizer, right-click the object type category and select Add Selected to
Category .
See also Organizing the model (p. 167)
Modifying logical areas and object type categories
To modify logical areas or object type categories, do any of the following:
In large projects, you can create sites for your project by right-clicking
Logical Areas and selecting Show Site(s). You can hide the sites byselecting Hide Site(s).
To make it easier to view and select parts, create a separate view orselection filter for each group of parts.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 170/260
170 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
See also Organizing the model (p. 167)
Viewing logical areas and object type categories
To view logical areas and object type categories in the model, do any of the following:
See also Organizing the model (p. 167)
To Do this
Rename logical areas andobject type categories
Right-click the name in Model Organizer and selectRename.
Redefine a logical area 1. Select the new area in the model.
2. Right-click the area name in Model Organizer andselect Add Selected to Category.
Move categories 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.
2. Drag the category to another location.
Add objects 1. Select the objects in the model.
2. Right-click the category name in Model Organizer and select Add Selected to Category.
Move objects 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and select the objects youwant to move.
3. Drag the objects to another category.
Remove objects 1. Select the object type category in Model Organizer.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and select the objects youwant to remove.
3. Right-click and select Remove from Category.
To Do this
View a logical area or objectsbelonging to an object typecategory
Select the logical area or the object type category.
The logical area or objects belonging to the selectedobject type category are highlighted in the model.
View more than one logicalarea or object type category ata time
Hold down the Ctrl key and select the logical areas andobject type categories you want to view.
View only the objectsbelonging the selectedcategory
Right-click a logical area or an object type category andselect Show Only Selected.
To show all objects again, right-click the category and
select Redraw View.
Hide the objects belonging tothe selected category
Right-click a logical area or an object type category andselect Hide.
To show all objects again, right-click the category andselect Redraw View.
View the classificationinformation of an object
Right-click the object in the model and select Model
Classification > Show Related Classification
or
in Model Organizer select an object and click .
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 171/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 171
Advanced Modeling
Deleting logical areas and object type categories
To delete a logical area or an object type category using Model Organizer:
1. Click Tools > Model Organizer....
2. Select a category under Logical Areas or Object Types.
3. Right-click and select Delete.4. Click OK to confirm.
See also Organizing the model (p. 167)
7.2 Phases
Use phases to break up a model into sections. Phases are often used to indicate erectionsequences. You can create reports and views, hide objects, and copy objects from other models,according to their phase number.
For example, you might have a large project which several users work on simultaneously insingle-user mode. First create a basic model that includes, for example, the columns. This isphase 1. You then copy this basic model to all users.
Each user then works on a separate part of the building. When a part of the model is completed,you can copy it back to the basic model as a separate phase (phase 2, 3, etc.).
See also Dividing the model into phases (p. 171)
Custom phase properties (p. 171)
Dividing the model into phases
To divide a model into phases:
1. Click Tools > Phase Manager.... The Phase Manager dialog box appears.
2. Click Add to create new phases.
3. Click Set current to make the selected phase the current phase.
From now on, Tekla Structures assigns all objects you create to the current phase. The @character in front of the phase number indicates the current phase.
4. Divide the model into phases.
a To identify the phase of an object, select an object and click Phases by objects.
Tekla Structures selects the phase of the object.
b To see which objects belong to a certain phase, select a phase from the list andthen click Objects by phases.
Tekla Structures highlights the corresponding objects in the model.
c To change the phase of one or more objects, select the objects, select a phase fromthe list, and then click Modify phase.
5. Click OK to save your changes.
See also Phases (p. 171)
Custom phase properties
You can add custom phase properties, which will appear as extra columns in the Phase
Manager dialog box.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 172/260
172 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
Define the names of phase properties in the objects.inp file. To use phase properties inreports and templates, use the syntax PHASE.ATTRIBUTE_NAME in the phase property fieldname.
See also Phases (p. 171)
7.3 Sequences
Use the Sequencer tool to name sequences and assign incremental numbers to parts. Forexample, you can define the order in which to erect parts by creating erection sequences. Youcan define several sequences for different purposes, and a part can belong to several sequencesat the same time.
Sequencer works by assigning a sequence number to a user-defined attribute of a part. Thesequence name that you enter in the Sequencer Properties dialog box is the name of the user-defined attribute defined in the objects.inp file.
Limitations Sequencer does not work for objects that are inside a reference model.
See also Creating a sequence (p. 172)
Adding parts to a sequence (p. 173)
Checking the sequence of a part (p. 173)
Modifying the sequence number of a part (p. 173)
Deleting a sequence (p. 173)
Creating a sequence
Use the Sequencer tool to assign sequence numbers to parts. If you want to view and modifythe sequence number afterwards, you must first create a user-defined attribute to which youassign sequence numbers.
To create a new sequence:
1. Create a user-defined attribute to which you assign sequence numbers.
a Open the objects.inp file in any standard text editor.
b In the Part attributes section, add a new user-defined attribute.
The value_type must be integer, and the field_format must be %d.
For example:
attribute("MY_INFO_1", "My Info 1", integer, "%d", no, none,
"0.0", "0.0")
c Save the file.d Restart Tekla Structures.
2. Click Tools > Sequencer to display the Sequencer Properties dialog box.
3. Type a name for the sequence. Use exactly the same name as in the objects.inp file.
For example, MY_INFO_1.
4. Click Apply.
5. Select the parts you want to include in the sequence.
The first part gets the sequence number 1, the second part number 2, and so on.
If you select a part that has already been included in the sequence, Tekla Structures asksif you want to override the existing number. If you click Yes, Tekla Structures gives thenext available number to the part.
6. To finish adding parts to the sequence, click Edit > Interrupt or press Esc.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 173/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 173
Advanced Modeling
See also Sequences (p. 172)
Adding parts to a sequence
To add parts to an existing sequence:
1. Click Tools > Sequencer to display the Sequencer Properties dialog box.2. Select a sequence name from the list.
3. Click OK or Apply.
4. Select the parts you want to add to the sequence.
5. To finish adding parts to the sequence, click Edit > Interrupt or press Esc.
See also Sequences (p. 172)
Checking the sequence of a part
You can check the sequence name and number of a part by using the Inquire tool.
To check the sequence of a part:
1. Click Tools > Inquire > Object.
2. Select a part.
Tekla Structures displays the properties of the part. The sequence name and number aredisplayed under More. For example:
See also Sequences (p. 172)
Modifying the sequence number of a part
Before you start, assign a sequence number to a user-defined attribute of a part.
To modify the sequence number of a part:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.2. Click User-defined attributes...
The current sequence number is displayed next to the user-defined attribute to which youassigned the sequence number. For example, MY_INFO_1.
3. Modify the sequence number.
4. Click Modify.
See also Sequences (p. 172)
Deleting a sequence
To delete a sequence:1. Click Tools > Sequencer....
You cannot add new parts to a sequence, unless the new part is at the endof the sequence. If the sequence changes, you must redefine the wholesequence.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 174/260
174 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
2. Select a sequence name from the list.
3. Click Delete and then click Yes.
See also Sequences (p. 172)
7.4 Lotting
With lots you can group assemblies for transporting to site. Lotting means that you evaluatespecific model parts with respect to the number of units that can be carried by a transfervehicle. For example, you can calculate how many concrete truck deliveries are needed to pourthe footings or slabs for a specific portion of the model. With this information, it is easier todetermine area requirements and create an erection schedule.
When you define lots, you must take into account the load-carrying capacity of the vehicle,because a lot cannot exceed the maximum total load capacity. You can calculate truck loadsizes based on material weights and model quantities. For most model parts, the weight is basedon the size, length, and material of the part.
You can use lotting in conjunction with the Sequencer tool. For example, you can load eachpart of the model onto a specific truck based on the erection sequence of the part.
The basic lotting process is the same for steel and concrete parts. However, if you are usingcast-in-place concrete, remember that the concrete is transported in a volumetric container (forexample, in a ten-cubic-yard truck). In that case, you must calculate the weight-carrying
capacity of the concrete vehicle before defining the number of lots.
See also Creating a lot (p. 174)
Adding parts to a lot (p. 175)
Removing parts from a lot (p. 175)
Deleting a lot (p. 175)
Sequences (p. 172)
Creating a lo t
To create a lot:1. Click Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.
2. Click Properties... to display the Lot Properties dialog box.
3. Type a name in the field at the bottom of the dialog box.
4. Type a lot number in the Number field.
5. Type the maximum weight of the lot in the Max weight field.
6. Click Add.
Tekla Structures creates an empty lot with the defined properties.
See also Lotting (p. 174)
To view the properties of a part, right-click the part and then selectInquire > Part or Properties...
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 175/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 175
Advanced Modeling
Adding parts to a lot
After you have created the needed lots, you must select each part of the model and assign themto a lot until the total load weight of the lot reaches the specified target.
To add parts to a lot:
1. Click Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.2. Select an existing lot from the list.
Tekla Structures highlights the parts included in the lot. The total weight of the lot andthe number of assemblies it contains are displayed under Applied values.
3. Hold down Shift and select the parts that you want to add to the lot.
4. Click Apply selected.
The weight and number of the added parts is displayed under Current values. TeklaStructures displays a warning message if the weight limit of the lot is exceeded.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.
When you re-open the dialog box, the Applied values include the weight and number of the parts you added.
See also Lotting (p. 174)
Removing parts from a lot
To remove parts from a lot:
1. Click Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.
2. Select an existing lot from the list.
Tekla Structures highlights the parts included in the lot.
3. Hold down Ctrl and select the parts you want to remove from the lot.
Tekla Structures deselects the parts.
4. Click Apply selected.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.
See also Lotting (p. 174)
Deleting a lotTo delete a lot:
1. Click Tools > Lotting to display the Lotting dialog box.
2. Click Properties...
3. Select an existing lot from the list.
4. Click Delete.
See also Lotting (p. 174)
Always use the Shift key when adding parts to an existing lot. If yousimply select parts, you will overwrite the contents of the lot. When youhold down Shift, you cannot select parts that already belong to anotherlot.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 176/260
176 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
7.5 Parametric modeling
Tekla Structures models are parametric, which means that each model object has parametersthat define various properties, including its geometry, location and relationship to other parts.
You can use these parameters to:
• Create variables that define the properties of the model object, such as a beam or column.
Variables can define fixed properties, such as the name of a column. They can also includeformulas, so that Tekla Structures calculates the property value each time you use themodel object.
• Create dependencies , or relationships, between model objects, so the properties of one
model object adjust if you change the related model object.
For example, you might create a dependency that offsets a column a fixed distance from aplane on a wall, so that when you move the wall, the column follows.
See also Defining variables
Creating distance variables
Creating reference distances
Parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures (p. 176)
Parametric profi les available in Tekla Structures
These are the parametric profiles available in Tekla Structures:
HIh-s-t*b (symmetric)
HIh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2
PHIh1-h2-s-t*b (symmetric)
PHIh1-h2-s-t1*b1-t2*b2
BLLh*b*t
BLZh*b*t
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 177/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 177
Advanced Modeling
BLUh*b*t
PLh*b
h=height
b=thickness
(smaller=b)
Dd
ELDd1*r1*d2*r2
PDd*t
EPDd1*r1*d2*r2*t
Ph*t
Ph*b*t
Ph1*b-h2*b*t
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 178/260
178 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
HKh-s-t*b-c (symmetric)
HKh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2-c
HQh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2 (centered)
HQh-s-t1*b1-t2*b2-c
ZZh-t-e-b (symmetric)
ZZh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2
CCh-t-e-b (symmetric)
CCh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2
CWh-t-e-b-f-h1
CUh-t-h1-b-e (symmetric)
CUh-t-h1-b1-h2-b2/e
EBh-t-e-b-a (symmetric)
EBh-t-e1-b1-e2-b2-a
Reference points:1=right
2=left
3=top
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 179/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 179
Advanced Modeling
BFh-s-b-h1
SPDd*t
SPDd1-d2*t
ECh-t-e-b-a (symmetric)
ECh-t-e1-b1-e1-b1-a
EDh-t-b-e-h1-h2-f1-f2-a
EEh-t-e-b-f1-f3-h1-f2-a
EFh-t-e-b1-b2-f1-f2/h1-a
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 180/260
180 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
EZh-t-e-b-f1-f3-h1-f2-a
EWh-t-e-b-b-f1-f2-h2-h1-a
RCDLs*h-d*t (symmetric)
RCDLs*h-d*t1*t2
RCXXs*h-b*t*h1-h2-ex
RCLs*h-b*t
RCDXs*h-b*h2*h1 (symmetric)
RCDXs*h-b*h4*h3*h2*h1RCDXs*h-b*h4*h3*h2*h1-ex
RCXs*h-b*h2*h1
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 181/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 181
Advanced Modeling
See also Parametric modeling (p. 176)
Parametric profiles (p. 53)
7.6 Sketched cross sectionsThis section explains how to create and modify your own cross sections, and how to use themin a model.
The cross sections you create using the cross section sketch editor can be parametric or fixed.You can change the dimensions of parametric cross sections each time you use them in amodel.
Contents Opening the cross section sketch editor (p. 181)
Sketching the outline of a cross section (p. 184)
Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)
Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)
Checking a sketched cross section (p. 197)
Saving a sketched cross section (p. 198)
Modifying a sketched cross section (p. 198)
Using sketched cross sections in a model (p. 201)
Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (p. 202)
Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section (p. 204)
Opening the cross section sketch editor Use the cross section sketch editor to create and modify your own profile cross sections.
To open the cross section sketch editor:
1. Open a Tekla Structures model.
2. Click Modeling > Profiles > Define Cross Section in Sketch Editor....
Tekla Structures opens the cross section sketch editor, the Sketch Browser, and theVariables dialog box.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 182/260
182 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
See also Sketch Browser (p. 182)
Variables (p. 183)
Sketch Browser The Sketch Browser shows the objects (lines, arcs, circles, constraints, dimensions, andchamfers) of a cross section sketch in a hierarchical, tree-like structure. The Sketch Browser automatically opens when you open the cross section sketch editor.
When you click an object in the cross section sketch editor, Tekla Structures highlights theobject in the Sketch Browser, and vice versa.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 183/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 183
Advanced Modeling
The Sketch Browser displays the following information about a cross section:
• Extrusion type (0, 1, or 2) and thickness of the sketch.
• Lines, arcs, and circles
• Constraints
• Distances and dimensions and their values• Chamfers and their type (0=None, 1=Line ... 7=Line and arc) and dimensions.
See also Opening the cross section sketch editor (p. 181)
Cross section extrusion types (p. 200)
Corner chamfer types and dimensions (p. 105)
VariablesUse the Variables dialog box to define the properties of a sketched cross section. Variables candefine fixed properties, or they can include formulas, so that Tekla Structures calculates theproperty value each time you use the profile in a model.
The Variables dialog box automatically opens when you open the cross section sketch editor.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 184/260
184 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
See also Opening the cross section sketch editor (p. 181)Defining variables
Display variables
Sketching the outline of a cross section
When you create a new cross section, start by sketching the outline and the holes of the crosssection using lines, arcs, and circles.
Ensure that you create a closed shape, unless you are creating a cross section of a consistentthickness, such as a cold rolled section.
See also Sketching a polyline (p. 184)
Sketching an arc (p. 185)
Sketching a circle (p. 185)
Sketching a polyline
You can create line segments in the cross section sketch editor by picking points. TeklaStructures automatically creates coincident constraints between the line segments and displaysa chamfer symbol where line segments meet.
To sketch a polyline:
1. Open the cross section sketch editor.
2. Click the Sketch polyline icon:
3. Pick points to create each line segment.
4. Click the middle mouse button to create the polyline.
The maximum number of points in a sketched cross section is 100.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 185/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 185
Advanced Modeling
See also Sketching the outline of a cross section (p. 184)
Sketching an arcYou can create an arc in the cross section sketch editor by picking three points.
To sketch an arc:
1. Open the cross section sketch editor.
2. Click the Sketch arc icon:
3. Pick three points to define the arc.
See also Sketching the outline of a cross section (p. 184)
Sketching a circleYou can create a circle in the cross section sketch editor by picking two points.
To sketch a circle:
1. Open the cross section sketch editor.
2. Click the Sketch circle icon:
3. Pick a point to indicate the center of the circle (1).
4. Pick a point to indicate the radius of the circle (2).
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 186/260
186 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
See also Sketching the outline of a cross section (p. 184)
Refining the shape of a sketched cross section
After you have sketched the outline of a cross section, use constraints to refine your sketchand lock the shape. For example, you can straighten lines, create 90 degree angles, force linesto meet, close the shape, and add chamfers in corners.
To straighten the entire profile, use horizontal and vertical constraints in conjunction with otherconstraints. Although the shape is locked, you can still rotate the profile in the model.
See also Adding a parallel constraint (p. 186)
Adding a perpendicular constraint (p. 187)
Adding a coincident constraint (p. 187)
Adding a fixed constraint (p. 188)
Adding a horizontal constraint (p. 188)
Adding a vertical constraint (p. 189)
Deleting a constraint (p. 189)
Adding a parallel constraintYou can force two lines in a sketched cross section to be parallel to each other.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add a parallel constraint:
1. Click the Parallel constraint icon:
2. Select a line in the sketch (1).
3. Select another line in the sketch (2).
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 187/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 187
Advanced Modeling
See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)
Adding a perpendicular constraintYou can force a line in a sketched cross section to be at a 90 degree angle to another line youselect. The lines do not have to intersect.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add a perpendicular constraint:
1. Click the Perpendicular constraint icon:
2. Select a line in the sketch (1).
3. Select another line in the sketch (2).
See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)
Adding a coincident constraintYou can force two lines in a sketched cross section to start or end at the same point, byextending or shortening one or both lines. The lines do not have to intersect.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add a coincident constraint:
Tekla Structures automatically creates coincident constraints:
• Where two lines meet.
• Between line segments when you draw them with the Sketch
polyline tool.
• Between the start of the first line segment and the end of the last line
segment in a shape, if they are within a certain distance of eachother.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 188/260
188 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
1. Ensure that the Snap to end points snap switch is active.
2. Click the Coincident constraint icon:
3. Pick the end of the first line (1).4. Pick the end of the second line. (2)
See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)
Adding a fixed constraintYou can lock the position and angle of a line in a sketched cross section so that other constraintsdo not affect it.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add a fixed constraint:
1. Click the Fixed constraint icon:
2. Select a line in the sketch.
See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)
Adding a horizontal constraintUse horizontal constraints to force a line in a sketched cross section to be parallel to the local xaxis. Tekla Structures automatically creates horizontal constraints when you create lines thatare nearly horizontal.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add a horizontal constraint:
1. Click the Horizontal constraint icon:
2. Select the lines you want to straighten (1, 2).
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 189/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 189
Advanced Modeling
See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)
Adding a vertical constraintUse vertical constraints to force a line in a sketched cross section to be parallel to the local yaxis. Tekla Structures automatically creates vertical constraints when you create lines that are
nearly vertical.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add a vertical constraint:
1. Click the Vertical constraint icon:
2. Select the lines you want to straighten (1, 2).
See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)
Deleting a constraint
To delete a constraint from a sketched cross section:
1. Click to open the Sketch Browser.
2. Select the constraint you want to delete.
3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
4. Click Refresh.
See also Refining the shape of a sketched cross section (p. 186)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 190/260
190 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section
After you have sketched a cross section, use dimensions to make different distances in the crosssection parametric. You can use these dimensions to define the size of the profile cross sectionwhen you use it in a model.
Tekla Structures also adds the dimensions you create to the list of variables that you can use in
calculations.
See also Adding a radial dimension to a sketch (p. 190)
Adding an angle dimension to a sketch (p. 191)
Adding a dimension between two points in a sketch (p. 191)
Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch (p. 192)
Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch (p. 192)
Deleting a dimension from a sketch (p. 193)
Adding a radial dimension to a sketchYou can create a radial dimension for an arc or a circle in a sketched cross section.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.To add a radial dimension:
1. Click the Sketch radial dimension icon:
2. Select the arc or circle.
Do not create too many dimensions in a sketch, or the dimensions willnot be able to adjust when the values are changed.
In the following example, if you create the dimension marked in red, thedimension b1 will no longer work:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 191/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 191
Advanced Modeling
See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)
Adding an angle dimension to a sketchYou can create an angle dimension between two lines in a sketched cross section. The angle iscalculated anti-clockwise from the first line you select.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add an angle dimension:
1. Click the Sketch angle dimension icon:
2. Select the first line (1).
3. Select the second line (2).
See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)
Adding a dimension between two points in a sketchYou can add a dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add a dimension between two points in a sketch:
1. Click the Sketch free dimension icon:
2. Pick a point to indicate the starting point of the dimension (1).
3. Pick a point to indicate the end point of the dimension (2).
If you are unable to see the angle symbol, scroll with the mouse wheel tozoom in.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 192/260
192 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
4. Pick a point to indicate the location of the dimension lines and text.
See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)
Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch
You can add a horizontal dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add a horizontal dimension to a sketch:
1. Click the Sketch horizontal dimension icon:
2. Pick a point to indicate the starting point of the dimension (1).
3. Pick a point to indicate the end point of the dimension (2).
4. Pick a point to indicate the location of the dimension lines and text.
See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)
Adding a vertical dimension to a sketchYou can add a vertical dimension to a sketched cross section, between two points you pick.
Before you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To add a vertical dimension to a sketch:
1. Click the Sketch vertical dimension icon:
2. Pick a point to indicate the starting point of the dimension (1).3. Pick a point to indicate the end point of the dimension (2).
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 193/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 193
Advanced Modeling
4. Pick a point to indicate the location of the dimension lines and text.
See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)
Deleting a dimension from a sketchTo delete a dimension from a sketched cross section:
1. Select the dimension you want to delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)
Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section
When you sketch a cross section, you can define positioning planes for it. With positioningplanes you can determine the planes Tekla Structures will use for positioning parts andcomponents.
See also Part positioning planes (p. 193)
Connection positioning planes (p. 194)Showing and hiding positioning planes (p. 195)
Moving positioning planes (p. 195)
Moving positioning plane handles (p. 196)
Reverting to default positioning planes (p. 197)
Part positioning planesWith part positioning planes you can determine how Tekla Structures positions parts thathave a sketched profile cross section. These planes are used for the On plane and At depth settings for parts, and also when placing custom components that are bound to boundaryplanes.
The part positioning planes are displayed in blue:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 194/260
194 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
The On plane options Left and Right are set according to the vertical blue planes, and theMiddle option is halfway between them.
The same principle applies to the At depth setting: the Front and Behind options are set
according to the horizontal blue planes, and the Middle option is halfway between them.
Example You can define part positioning planes so that an asymmetric cross section will be positionedaccording to its web only. In the following example, the Middle option is illustrated in gray
dotted lines:
See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)
Connection positioning planes
With connection positioning planes you can determine how Tekla Structures positionscomponents in relation to the component main part that has a sketched profile cross section.
Middle option
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 195/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 195
Advanced Modeling
The connection positioning planes are displayed in green:
Example The following image shows the default connection positioning planes of a double tee slab that
was created as a sketched cross section. The green line illustrates the default connectionpositioning planes.
To place connections according to the location of the stems of the double tee, move theconnection positioning planes as shown below.
See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)
Showing and hiding positioning planesBefore you start, sketch the shape of the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To show or hide the positioning planes, do one of the following:
See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)
Moving positioning planes
To move positioning planes:
To Do this
Show or hide the part positioningplanes Click .
Show or hide the connectionpositioning planes Click .
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 196/260
196 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
1. Display the positioning planes you want to move.
2. Select the positioning planes.
3. Select one of the positioning plane handles.
4. Right-click and select a Move command from the pop-up menu.
5. Move the planes like any other object in Tekla Structures.
See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)
Showing and hiding positioning planes (p. 195)
Moving an object
Moving positioning plane handlesYou can move the handles of each positioning plane. If you move the handles away from theoutmost corners of the sketched cross section, you must bind them by adding a dimension toeach handle. Otherwise the positioning will not function correctly in the model.
To move the positioning plane handles:
1. Click the positioning plane to display the handles.
The handles are displayed in pink. By default, the handles are at the outmost corners of the sketched cross section. For example:
2. Click a handle to select it.3. Move the handle like any other object in Tekla Structures. For example:
a Right-click and select Move.
b Pick the origin for moving.
c Pick a destination point.
4. If the handle is not at the outmost corner of the cross section, add a dimension betweenthe handle and the corner.
Example In the following examples, the left handle of the positioning plane has been bound by using ahorizontal dimension (b1):
The same handle controls both the vertical and horizontal plane, so you
can move them both at the same time.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 197/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 197
Advanced Modeling
See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)
Reverting to default positioning planesYou can revert back to the default positioning planes of a sketched cross section if you havemoved the planes.
To revert to the default positioning planes, do one of the following:
See also Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)
Checking a sketched cross section
To check that the constraints and dimensions in a sketched cross section work correctly:
1. Double-click a dimension line to open the Distance Properties dialog box.
2. Change the Value field.
3. Click Modify.
Tekla Structures updates the cross section in the cross section sketch editor.
To Do this
Revert to the default part positioning planes 1. Click to show the part positioning planes.
2. Select the part positioning planes.
3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-upmenu.
4. Click again to check that the planes have
reverted back to the default.
Revert to the default connection positioning planes 1. Click to show the connection positioning
planes.
2. Select the connection positioning planes.
3. Right-click and select Delete from the pop-upmenu.
4. Click again to check that the planes havereverted back to the default.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 198/260
198 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
4. Check that the shape of the profile does not change and that the dimensions adjustcorrectly.
5. Click Cancel to close the Distance Properties dialog box.
See also Using sketched cross sections in a model (p. 201)
Saving a sketched cross section
Tekla Structures saves the cross section in the current model folder. The sketched cross sectionsare available in the Others section in the profile catalog.
To save a sketched cross section, do one of the following:
See also Adding dimensions to a sketched cross section (p. 190)
Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (p. 202)
Modifying a sketched cross section
You can modify existing cross section sketches, for example, by modifying chamfers ordimensions. You can also move corners or holes by moving the handles. The chamfers aremoved automatically when you move the handles.
Note the following limitations when naming cross sections:
• You cannot use the name of a standard profile.
• You cannot include numbers, special characters, or blank spaces in
the cross section name.
• Lower case letters are automatically converted into upper case
letters.
To Do this
Save a new cross section
1. Click Save sketch .
2. Type a name in the Prefix field, and then click OK.
Update an existing cross section
1. Click Save sketch .
2. Click Yes when prompted to update the existingcross section.
Save a copy of the cross sectionunder a different name 1. Click Save sketch as .
2. Type a new name in the Prefix field, and then click OK.
Sketched cross sections are saved in the xslib.db1 file, which is alibrary file that contains custom components and sketches. Ordinaryprofiles are saved in the profdb.bin file.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 199/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 199
Advanced Modeling
To modify a sketched cross section:
1. Click Modeling > Profiles > Edit Cross Section in Sketch Editor...
The Component Catalog dialog box opens.
2. Double-click a cross section to open it in the cross section sketch editor.
Sketched cross sections have the symbol next to their name.
3. Double-click an object to modify its properties.
The sketch objects you can modify appear in yellow.
4. Modify the object properties.
5. Click Modify in the object properties dialog box.
6. Close the object properties dialog box.
7. Click the Save sketch as icon to save the changes.
See also Modifying chamfers in a sketch (p. 199)
Setting the sketch thickness (p. 199)
Modifying chamfers in a sketchYou can change the shape and dimensions of chamfers in a sketched cross section. Forexample, you can create rounded cross section corners.
To modify a chamfer:
1. Double-click a chamfer symbol in the cross section sketch editor.
2. In the Chamfer Properties dialog box, change the shape and dimensions of the chamfer.
3. Click Modify.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
5. Click the Save sketch as icon to save the changes.
See also Modifying a sketched cross section (p. 198)
Corner chamfer types and dimensions (p. 105)
Setting the sketch thicknessIf you have sketched an open shape, such as a cold rolled section, you must define the extrusiontype and thickness of the sketch in the Sketch Browser. The thickness can be either fixed orparametric.
• You cannot change dimensions that have been calculated using
formulas in the Variables dialog box.
• Constraints may also prevent you from changing dimensions.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 200/260
200 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
To set the thickness of a sketch:
1. In the cross section sketch editor, sketch an open polyline.
2. Do one of the following:
• To set a fixed thickness:
a In the Sketch Browser, right-click Thickness and select Add Equation from
the pop-up menu.b Type the value of the thickness after =.
• To define a parametric thickness:
a In the Variables dialog box, add a new parameter variable for Length (forexample, P1).
b In the Formula column, define the default value for the parameter variable.
c In the Sketch Browser, right-click Thickness and select Add Equation fromthe pop-up menu.
d Type the name of the parameter variable (for example, P1) after =.
3. To define the extrusion type:
a In the Sketch Browser, right-click Extrusion Type and select Add Equation
from the pop-up menu.b Type the extrusion type number (0, 1, or 2) after =.
4. Click the Save sketch as icon to save the changes.
See also Modifying a sketched cross section (p. 198)
Cross section extrusion types (p. 200)
Cross section extrusion typesThe extrusion type defines how a cross section of a consistent thickness is extruded. When youchange the thickness, the profile grows inwards, outwards, or symmetrically in both directions,depending on the extrusion type. You must define the extrusion type for cross sections that
consist of an open polyline.
The extrusion types are:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 201/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 201
Advanced Modeling
See also Setting the sketch thickness (p. 199)
Using sketched cross sections in a modelOnce you have created a cross section and saved it in the profile catalog, you are ready to use itin the model. If you have applied constraints correctly, the shape of the profile will bemaintained when you change its dimensions.
To use a sketched cross section for a new part in a model:
1. Double-click a toolbar button to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.
• For steel parts, click the Select... button next to the Profile field.
• For concrete parts, click the button next to the Shape field.
3. Open the Others branch at the end of the profile tree.
4. Select a profile with the sketched cross section.
5. Optional: If the cross section is parametric, define its dimensions in the Value column onthe General tab.
6. Click OK to apply the changes.
7. Pick points to place the part in the model.
See also Creating an image of a sketched cross section (p. 201)
Creating an image of a sketched cross sectionTo illustrate the shape and dimensions of your profile cross section, you can create an image of the cross section you have sketched. Tekla Structures displays the image when you browse forsketched profiles in the profile catalog.
Type Description Image
0 The sketch is extrudedsymmetrically to the outside andinside of the polyline.
(Default)
1 The sketch is extruded to theoutside of the polyline.
2 The sketch is extruded to theinside of the polyline.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 202/260
202 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
The image must be in Windows bitmap format (*.bmp) and can be created with any bitmapeditor, for example Microsoft Paint. You can also take a screenshot of your cross section in thecross section sketch editor and use that image.
To create an image of a sketched cross section using a screenshot:
1. Open the cross section sketch editor.
2. Click the sketch to ensure it is the active view.
3. Press F12 on your keyboard to take a screenshot of the sketch without the borders.
Tekla Structures saves the screenshot in the..\TeklaStructuresModels\<model>\snapshots folder.
4. Open the screenshot in any graphics editor (for example, Microsoft Paint) and modifythe image if necessary.
5. Save the image in bmp format in the ..\TeklaStructures\<version>\nt\bitmaps folder.
Use the cross section name as the filename, for example, mysketch.bmp.
See also Using sketched cross sections in a model (p. 201)
Creating a screenshot (p. 124)
Saving a screenshot in bitmap format (p. 125)
Importing and exporting sketched cross sectionsTo use a sketched cross section in other Tekla Structures models, you have to export the crosssection to a file (*.uel), and then import the file into another Tekla Structures model.
Use the Component Catalog to import and export sketched cross sections. They have thefollowing symbols and numbers in the Component Catalog:
See also Importing sketched cross sections (p. 203)
Exporting sketched cross sections (p. 203)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 203/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 203
Advanced Modeling
Importing sketched cross sectionsAfter you have exported sketched cross sections to a file, you can import the cross sections toanother Tekla Structures model.
To import sketched cross sections:
1. Open the Tekla Structures model you want to import to.
2. Press Ctrl+F to open the Component Catalog.3. Optional: To view the sketched cross sections and profiles already available in the
current model, select Sketched profiles from the list box.
4. In the component list, right-click and select Import... from the pop-up menu.
5. In the Import Components dialog box, browse for the folder which contains theexported file (*.uel).
6. Select the file to import.
7. Click OK.
See also Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (p. 202)
Exporting the profile catalog
Exporting elements from the profile catalog
Exporting sketched cross sectionsTo export sketched cross sections:
1. Open the Tekla Structures model you want to export from.
2. Press Ctrl+F to open the Component Catalog.
3. Select Sketched profiles from the list.
Tekla Structures lists all the sketched cross sections available in the current model.
4. Select the cross sections you want to export. To export several cross sections, hold downthe Ctrl key when selecting.
5. Right-click and select Export... from the pop-up menu.6. In the Export Components dialog box, enter a name for the export file in the Selection
box.
7. Optional: To save the export file to a specific location, browse for the folder.
By default, Tekla Structures saves the export file in the current model folder.
8. Click OK.
See also Importing and exporting sketched cross sections (p. 202)
If you have created a profile using a sketched cross section and want touse the profile in another model, you need to import both the crosssection and profile. To use profiles from a model, you can either exportand then import the entire profile catalog or a part of it, or copy theprofdb.bin file.
To automatically import all *.uel files from a folder when creating anew model, use the advanced option XS_UEL_IMPORT_FOLDER.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 204/260
204 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
Example: Creating a symmetric C-shaped cross section
This example shows how to create a cross section using variables. You will create a symmetricC-shaped cross section with the dimensions b1 = b2 and h2 = h3. When you use the profile inthe model, you can change the following dimensions:
• Width (b1)
• Total height (h1)
• Height (h2)
• Thickness (P1)
• Chamfers (P2)
In the following example, you will first sketch a C-shaped cross section and add dimensions toit. After that, you will set the cross section thickness and modify the chamfers. Finally, you willuse the cross section in a model.
See also Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross section (p. 204)
Example: Adding dimensions to the cross section (p. 205)
Example: Setting the cross section thickness (p. 206)
Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section (p. 207)
Example: Using the cross section in a model (p. 208)
Example: Sketching a C-shaped cross sectionTo sketch the outline of a C-shaped cross section:
1. Open the cross section sketch editor.
2. Use the Sketch polyline command to create a rough C-shaped cross section.
At this stage, the cross section does not have to be symmetric or have the rightdimensions.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 205/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 205
Advanced Modeling
3. Straighten the lines using the Add horizontal constraint and Add vertical
constraint commands.
4. Save the cross section and name it CSHAPE.
See also Opening the cross section sketch editor (p. 181)
Sketching a polyline (p. 184)
Adding a horizontal constraint (p. 188)
Adding a vertical constraint (p. 189)
Saving a sketched cross section (p. 198)
Example: Adding dimensions to the cross sectionTo add dimensions to the cross section:
1. Use the Sketch horizontal dimension command to create the distances b1 and
b2.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 206/260
206 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
2. Use the Sketch vertical dimension command to create the distances h1, h2, and
h3.
3. In the Variables dialog box, enter the following values for the distances:
4. Ensure that Visibility is set to Show for the distances b1, h1, and h2.
5. Save the cross section.
See also Adding a horizontal dimension to a sketch (p. 192)
Adding a vertical dimension to a sketch (p. 192)
Saving a sketched cross section (p. 198)
Variables (p. 183)
Example: Setting the cross section thickness
To set the cross section thickness:
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 207/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 207
Advanced Modeling
1. In the Variables dialog box, do the following:
a Click Add to add a parameter variable P1.
b In the Formula box, enter 20.00.
c In the Visiblity box, select Show.
d In the Label in dialog box box, enter Thickness.
2. In the Sketch Browser, set the cross section thickness using the parameter variable P1.
a Right-click Thickness, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and thenenter =P1.
b Right-click ExtrusionType, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and thenenter =2 to get the sketch extruded to the inside of the polyline.
3. Save the cross section.
See also Variables (p. 183)
Sketch Browser (p. 182)
Cross section extrusion types (p. 200)
Saving a sketched cross section (p. 198)
Example: Modifying the chamfers of the cross section
To modify the chamfers of the cross section:
1. Double-click one of the cross section chamfers.
2. In the Chamfer Properties dialog box, do the following:
a Change the chamfer type to Line .
b Click Modify.
c Repeat steps a–b for all the cross section chamfers.
3. In the Variables dialog box, do the following:
a Click Add to add a parameter variable P2.
b In the Formula box, enter 10.00.
c In the Visiblity box, select Show.
d In the Label in dialog box box, enter Chamfer.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 208/260
208 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
4. In the Sketch Browser, do the following:
a Double-click Chamfer constraint to open the chamfer properties.
b Right-click Chamfer X, select Add equation from the pop-up menu, and thenenter =P2.
c Enter the same value for Chamfer Y.
d Repeat steps a–d for all the cross section chamfers.
5. Save the cross section.
See also Modifying chamfers in a sketch (p. 199)
Variables (p. 183)
Sketch Browser (p. 182)
Saving a sketched cross section (p. 198)
Example: Using the cross section in a modelTo use the cross section in a model:
1. Double-click a toolbar button open the part properties dialog box.
2. Open the Select Profile dialog box.
• For steel parts, click the Select... button next to the Profile field.
• For concrete parts, click the button next to the Shape field.
3. Open the Others branch at the end of the profile tree, and select the CSHAPE profile.
4. Optional: Modify the dimensions of the cross section profile on the General tab.
5. Click OK to apply the changes.
6. Pick points to place the part in the model.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 209/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 209
Advanced Modeling
See also Modifying a sketched cross section (p. 198)
Defining positioning planes for a sketched cross section (p. 193)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 210/260
210 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Advanced Modeling
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 211/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 211
Modeling Settings
8 Modeling Settings
This section provides more information about the various settings you can modify in TeklaStructures.
Contents • General settings (p. 211)
• View settings (p. 215)
• Part properties (p. 217)
• Detail properties (p. 227)
• Numbering settings (p. 233)
8.1 General settings
This section provides more information about some general modeling settings.
See also Grid properties (p. 211)
Grid line properties (p. 212)
Point properties (p. 212)
Rotation settings (p. 213)
Color settings (p. 213)
Transparency settings (p. 214)
Screenshot settings (p. 214)
Grid properties
Use the Grid dialog box to view and modify the grid properties.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 212/260
212 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
See also Grids (p. 29)
Grid line properties
Use the Grid Line Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a single gridline.
See also Grid lines (p. 32)
Point properties
Use the Point Information dialog box to view and modify the properties of a point.
Option
Coordinates The coordinates of the grid in the global x, y, and z directions (xand y are relative, z is absolute).
• X - grid lines vertical to the work plane
• Y - grid lines horizontal to the work plane
• Z - elevations in the structure
Labels The names of the grid lines.
Line extensions Define how far the grid lines extend in the directions Left/Below and Right/Above.
Origin The coordinates of the grid origin in the global x, y, and zdirections.
Magnetic grid plane Select to bind objects to grid lines.
User-defined
attributes...
Click to access the user-defined properties of the grid.
Option
Label The name of the grid line.
Depth in view plane The height of the grid plane perpendicular to the viewplane.
Extension Left/Below Define how far the grid lines extend in the directions Left/
Below and Right/Above.Extension Right/Above
Magnetic grid plane Select to bind objects to the grid line.
User-defined attributes... Click to access the user-defined properties of the grid line.
Visible in drawings Select to make the grid line visible in drawings.
Grid line automatic
dimensioning
Select to use single grid lines in grid dimensioning.
Option
Phase The phase number.
You can filter objects by their phase numbers.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 213/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 213
Modeling Settings
See also Points (p. 42)
Rotation settings
Use the Copy - Rotate and Move - Rotate dialog boxes to view and modify the settings that areused when you rotate objects in Tekla Structures.
See also Rotating objects
Color settings
Use the Object Representation dialog box to define the color of object groups.
See also Object representation settings (p. 133)
Id The ID number, which is used in log files.
You can filter objects by their ID numbers.
Coordinates The local (work plane) and global x, y, and z coordinates of apoint. Indicates the correct location of the point.
Option
Option
X0 The x and y coordinates of the starting point of the rotation axis.
Y0
Origin angle The angle of the rotation axis when rotating around a line on thework plane.
Number of copies Defines the number of copies created.
dZ The difference in position between the original and copied object inthe z direction.
Rotation angle The rotation angle between the original and new position.
Around Defines whether the rotation axis is a line on the work plane or inthe z direction.
Option
As is The current color is used.
If the object belongs to one of the object groups defined in thefollowing rows, its color is defined by the settings that the object
group in question has on that row.Colors Select color from the list.
Color by class All parts are colored according to their Class property.
Color by lot Parts belonging to different lots get different colors.
Color by phase Parts belonging to different phases get different colors.
Color by analysis type Displays parts according to the member analysis type.
Color by analysis
utility check
Displays parts according to the utilization ratio in analysis.
Color by attribute Displays parts in different colors according to the values of auser-defined attribute.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 214/260
214 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
Transparency settings
Use the Object Representation dialog box to define the transparency of object groups.
See also Object representation settings (p. 133)
Screenshot settings
Use the Screenshot dialog box to view and modify the screenshot settings.
The following screenshot options are only available in rendered views:
Option
As is The current visibility.
If the object belongs to any object group whose visibility andcolor settings have been defined, the settings will be read fromthat object group.
Visible Object is shown in the views.
50% transparent Object is transparent in rendered views.
70% transparent
90% transparent
Hidden Object is not shown in the views.
Option
View name Shows the selected view name.
View Includes the view content and window borders in thescreenshot.
View without borders Includes only the view content in the screenshot.
Rendered view For high resolution screenshots from rendered views. TheOptions... button displays the Screenshot Options dialog box.
Place on clipboard Places the screenshot on the clipboard.
Print to file Saves the screenshot to a file.
Option
Final width The width of the screenshot.Uses the same unit as other dimensions in modeling.
Final height The height of the screenshot.
Uses the same unit as other dimensions in modeling.
DPI The pixel density (DPI) of the screenshot.
There are limitations to pixel density. You can change the DPIusing a graphics editor.
White background Uses white background.
Smooth lines Uses smooth lines to decrease jagged edges.
Line width Sets the line width.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 215/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 215
Modeling Settings
See also Creating a screenshot (p. 124)
8.2 View settings
This section provides more information about specific view settings.
See also View properties (p. 215)
Grid view properties (p. 215)
Display settings (p. 216)
View properties
Use the View Properties dialog box to view and modify the view properties.
See also Views (p. 33)
Grid view properties
Use the Creation of Views Along Grid Lines dialog box to view and modify the properties of
grid views.
Option
Name The name of the view.
Angle Whether the view angle is Plane or 3D.
Projection The projection type of rendered views.
Orthogonal: All objects are of equal size (no perspective).When you zoom, text and point size remains the same. Inaddition, the zoom remains on part surfaces.
Perspective: Distant objects appear smaller than close ones, asdo text and points. You can zoom, rotate the model, or flythrough it.
Rotation How the view is rotated around the z and x axes. Rotation isview-specific.
View type The appearance of the model in the view.
Color and transparency
in all views
The color and transparency setting that is used in all views(according to the status of the objects in the model).
Representation... Opens the Object Representation dialog box for definingcolor and transparency settings.
View depth The thickness of the displayed slice of model. You can definethe depth separately upwards and downwards from the viewplane. Only objects positioned within the view depth arevisible in the model.
Display... Opens the Display dialog box for defining which objects aredisplayed in the view and how.
Visible object group Which object group is displayed in the view.
Object group... Opens the Object Group - View Filter dialog box for creatingand modifying object groups.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 216/260
216 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
See also Creating grid views (p. 38)
Display settings
Use the Display dialog box to define which object types Tekla Structures displays and howthey appear in the model. Some of these settings may affect system performance.
Option
View plane The plane of the view defined by two axes similarly to thedefault view.
Number of views Defines which grid lines the views will be created of.
None does not create any views.
One (First) only creates the view closest to the grid origin.
One (Last) only creates the view furthest from the grid origin.
All creates all views in grid planes in the relevant direction.
View name prefix The prefix to be used with the grid label in the view name. Thisname overrides the name in the view properties.
View names consist of a prefix and a grid label, e.g. PLAN+3000. If the View name prefix field is left empty, no prefix isused. Tekla Structures adds a dash and a running number to theview name if view names are otherwise identical.
View properties Defines which view properties (applied or saved) will be used.
Each view plane has its own view properties. You can load theproperties from the current view properties with the option<applied values> or from saved view properties. The Show... button displays the current view properties.
Option
Parts Defines how parts are displayed.
Fast uses a rapid drawing technique that displays internal hiddenedges, but skips cuts.
Exact displays the cuts, but hides the internal hidden lines of parts.
Reference line shows parts as sticks. This option increasesdisplay speed significantly, when viewing the entire model, orlarge parts of it.
Bolts Defines how bolts are displayed.
Fast displays the axis and a cross to represent the bolt head. Thisis the recommended representation mode for bolts, because itincreases display speed significantly and consumes less systemmemory.
Exact shows bolts, washers, and nuts as solids.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 217/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 217
Modeling Settings
See also Defining which objects are displayed (p. 128)
8.3 Part properties
This section provides more information about the properties of specific steel and concrete parts.
See also Steel column properties (p. 218)
Steel beam properties (p. 218)
Contour plate properties (p. 219)
Orthogonal beam properties (p. 220)Twin profile properties (p. 221)
Pad footing properties (p. 222)
Strip footing properties (p. 223)
Concrete column properties (p. 224)
Concrete beam properties (p. 225)
Concrete slab properties (p. 225)
Concrete panel properties (p. 226)
Holes Defines how holes are displayed.
Fast only displays the circle in the first plane. When using thisoption, Tekla Structures always displays fast holes on the first part(counting from the head of the bolt). If there are slotted holes in
any of the parts, a slotted hole is displayed on the first part, evenif the hole in that part is not slotted. The new slotted hole has thesame size and rotation as the first slotted hole (counting from thehead of the bolt).
Holes that are outside a part are always displayed as fast holes inrendered views.
Exact shows holes as solids.
Exact long holes only displays slotted holes in exact mode andordinary holes in fast mode.
Point size Defines the size of points in views. You can also change the sizeof the part handle using this field.
In model increases the point size on the screen when you zoomin.
In view does not increase the point size.
AutoStick Defines whether the objects are shown as sticks or as objects.This option is only available in wire frame views.
By dragging the sliders you can adjust the zoom distance whereobjects should be shown as reference lines.
This option increases performance significantly when viewinglarge models. It still lets you zoom in on a small area and displayit exactly.
Option
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 218/260
218 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
Steel column properties
Use the Column Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a steel column.The file name extension of a column properties file is *.clm.
See also Creating a steel column (p. 66)
Steel beam properties
Use the Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a steel beam, steelpolybeam, or curved beam. The file name extension of a beam properties file is *.prt.
Option
Part prefix and start
number
The part mark series of the column.
Assembly prefix and
start number
The assembly mark series of the column.
Name The user-definable name of the column.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.
Profile The profile of the column.
Material The material of the column.
Finish The type of finish.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fireretardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group columns.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the column.
Vertical The position of the column, relative to its reference point.
Rotation How the column is rotated around its axis.
Horizontal The horizontal position of the column, relative to its referencepoint.
Top The position of the second end of the column in the global zdirection.
Bottom The position of the first end of the column in the global zdirection.
Analysis tab The analysis properties of the column.
Composite tab The analysis properties of the slabs in composite constructions.
Start releases tab The support conditions of the column ends.
End releases tab
Design tab The design information of the column.
Deforming tab Warping, cambering, and shortening of the column.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 219/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 219
Modeling Settings
See also Creating a steel beam (p. 67)
Contour plate properties
Use the Contour Plate Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a contourplate. The file name extension of a contour plate properties file is *.cpl.
Option
Part prefix and start
number
The part mark series of a beam.
Assembly prefix and
start number
The assembly mark series of the beam.
Name The user-definable name of a beam.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.
Profile The profile of a beam.
Material The material of a beam.
Finish The finish type.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group beams.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of a beam.
On plane The position of a beam on the work plane.
Rotation How much a beam is rotated around its axis on the work plane.
At depth The position of a beam, in terms of depth perpendicular to thework plane.
End offset The offsets of beam ends relative to a beam’s reference line.
Radius The plane of curvature and radius of a curved beam.Number of segments The number of segments Tekla Structures uses when drawing
a curved beam.
Analysis tab The analysis properties of the beam.
Loading tab The loading properties of the beam.
Composite tab The analysis properties of the slabs in compositeconstructions.
Start releases tab The support conditions of the beam ends.
End releases tab
Design tab The design information of the beam.
Deforming tab Warping, cambering, and shortening of the beam.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 220/260
220 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
See also Creating a contour plate (p. 68)
Orthogonal beam properties
Use the Orthogonal Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of anorthogonal steel beam. The file name extension of an orthogonal beam properties file is*.crs.
Option
Part prefix and start
number
The part mark series of the contour plate.
Assembly prefix and
start number
The assembly mark series of the contour plate.
Name The user-definable name of the contour plate.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.
Profile The profile of the contour plate.
The format is PL+ thickness, for example PL20.
Material The material of the contour plate.
Finish The finish type.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,
fire retardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group contour plates.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the contour plate.
At depth The position of the contour plate, in terms of depth,perpendicular to the work plane.
Analysis tab The analysis properties of the contour plate.
Loading tab The loading properties of the plate.
Spanning tab The spanning properties of the plate.
Design tab The design information of the contour plate.
Option
Part prefix and start
number
The part mark series of the beam.
Assembly prefix and
start number
The assembly mark series of the beam.
Name The user-definable name of the beam.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.
Profile The profile of the beam.
Material The material of the beam.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 221/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 221
Modeling Settings
See also Creating an orthogonal beam (p. 69)
Twin profile properties
Use the Twin Profile Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a twin steelprofile. The file name extension of a twin profile properties file is *.dia.
Finish The finish type.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group beams.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the beam.
Vertical The position of the beam, relative to its reference point.
Rotation How much the beam is rotated around its axis.
Horizontal The horizontal position of the beam, relative to its referencepoint.
Top The position of the second end of the beam in the z directionof the work plane.
Bottom The position of the first end of the beam in the z direction of the work plane.
Analysis tab The analysis properties of the beam.
Composite tab The analysis properties of the slabs in compositeconstructions.
Start releases tab The support conditions of the beam ends.
End releases tab
Design tab The design information of the beam.
Option
Option
Part prefix and start
number
The part mark series of the twin profile.
Assembly prefix and
start number
The assembly mark series of the twin profile.
Name The user-definable name of the twin profile.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.
Profile The profile of both the beams in the twin profile.
Material The material of the beams.
Finish The type of finish.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fireretardant coating, etc.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 222/260
222 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
See also Creating a twin profile (p. 70)
Pad footing properties
Use the Pad Footing Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a pad footing.The file name extension of a pad footing properties file is *.cpf.
Class Used to group twin profiles.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the twin profile.
On plane The position of the twin profile on the work plane.
Rotation Defines how the twin profile is rotated around its axis on thework plane.
At depth The beam position, in terms of depth, perpendicular to thework plane.
End offset The offsets of the ends of the beam, relative to the beam’sreference line.
Twin profile type Defines how the profiles are combined.
Horizontal The horizontal clearance between the profiles.
Vertical The vertical clearance between the profiles.
Analysis tab The analysis properties of the twin profile.
Composite tab The analysis properties of the slabs in composite constructions.
Start releases tab The support conditions of the twin profile ends.
End releases tab
Design tab The design information of the twin profile.
Option
Option
Name The user-definable name of the pad footing.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.
Profile The profile of the pad footing.
Material The material of the pad footing.
Finish The type of finish.Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group pad footings.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the pad footing.
Vertical The vertical position of the pad footing, relative to itsreference point.
Rotation How much the pad footing is rotated around its axis.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 223/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 223
Modeling Settings
See also Creating a pad footing (p. 78)
Strip footing properties
Use the Strip Footing Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a strip
footing. The file name extension of a strip footing properties file is *.csf.
Horizontal The horizontal position of the pad footing, relative to itsreference point.
Top The position of the top surface of the pad footing in the globalz direction.
Bottom The position of the bottom surface of the pad footing in theglobal z direction.
Cast unit prefix and
start number
Define the cast unit series of the pad footing.
Cast unit type Indicates whether the footing is precast or cast in place.
Option
Option
Name The user-definable name of the strip footing.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.
Shape The profile of the strip footing.
Material The material of the strip footing.
Finish The type of finish.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fireretardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group strip footings.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined
attributes
User-defined properties of the strip footing.
On plane The position of the strip footing on the work plane.
Rotation How much the strip footing is rotated around its axis on thework plane.
At depth The position of the strip footing in terms of depth perpendicularto the work plane.
End offset The offsets of the ends of the strip footing relative to itsreference line.
Cast unit prefix and
start number
Define the cast unit series of the strip footing.
Cast unit type Indicates whether the footing is precast or cast in place.
Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved strip footing.
Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved strip footing.
Analysis tab The analysis properties of the strip footing.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 224/260
224 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
See also Creating a strip footing (p. 78)
Concrete column properties
Use the Concrete Column Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of aconcrete column. The file name extension of a concrete column properties file is *.ccl.
See also Creating a concrete column (p. 78)
Start releases tab The support conditions of the footing ends.
End releases tab
Design tab The design information of the footing.
Option
Option
Name The user-definable name of the column.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.
Profile The profile of the column.
Material The material of the column.
Finish The type of finish.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized, fireretardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group columns.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the column.
Vertical The vertical position of the column relative to its referencepoint.
Rotation How much the column is rotated around its axis.
Horizontal The horizontal position of the column relative to its referencepoint.
Top The position of the second end of the column in the global zdirection.
Bottom The position of the first end of the column in the global zdirection.
Cast unit prefix andstart number Define the cast unit series of the column.
Cast unit type Indicates whether the column is precast or cast in place.
Analysis tab The analysis properties of the column.
Start releases tab The support conditions of the column ends.
End releases tab
Design tab The design information of the column.
Deforming tab Warping, cambering and shortening of the column.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 225/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 225
Modeling Settings
Concrete beam properties
Use the Concrete Beam Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concretebeam or polybeam. The file name extension of a concrete beam properties file is *.cbm.
See also Creating a concrete beam (p. 79)
Concrete slab properties
Use the Concrete Slab Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concreteslab. The file name extension of a concrete slab properties file is *.csl.
Option
Name The user-definable name of the beam.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.
Shape The profile of the beam.
Material The material of the beam.
Finish The type of finish.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group beams.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the beam.
On plane The beam position on the work plane.
Rotation How much the beam is rotated around its axis on the work plane.
At depth The position of the beam in terms of depth perpendicular tothe work plane.
End offset The offsets of the ends of the beam, relative to its referenceline.
Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved beam.
Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved beam.
Cast unit prefix and start
number
Define the cast unit series of the beam.
Cast unit type Indicates whether the beam is precast or cast in place.
Analysis tab The analysis properties of the beam.
Start releases tab The support conditions of the beam ends.
End releases tab
Loading tab The loading properties of the beam.
Design tab The design information of the beam.Deforming tab Warping, cambering and shortening of the beam.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 226/260
226 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
See also Creating a concrete slab (p. 80)
Concrete panel properties
Use the Concrete Panel Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a concretepanel. The file name extension of a concrete panel properties file is *.cpn.
Option
Name The user-definable name of the slab.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,and to identify parts of the same type.
Thickness The thickness of the slab.
Material The material of the slab.
Finish The type of finish.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group slabs.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the slab.
At depth The position of the slab, in terms of depth, perpendicular tothe work plane.
Analysis tab The analysis properties of the slab.
Spanning tab The spanning properties of the slab.
Loading tab The loading properties of the slab.
Design tab The design information of the slab.
Cast unit prefix and start
number
Define the cast unit series of the slab.
Cast unit type Indicates whether the slab is precast or cast in place.
Option
Name The user-definable name of the panel.
Tekla Structures uses part names in reports and drawing lists,
and to identify parts of the same type.
Shape The profile of the panel (thickness × height of the wall).
Material The material of the panel.
Finish The type of finish.
Finish is user-definable. It describes how the part surface hasbeen treated, e.g. with anti-corrosive paint, hot galvanized,fire retardant coating, etc.
Class Used to group panels.
For example, you can display parts of different classes indifferent colors.
User-defined attributes User-defined properties of the panel.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 227/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 227
Modeling Settings
See also Creating a concrete panel (p. 81)
8.4 Detail properties
This section provides more information about the properties of specific modeling details.
See also Bolt properties (p. 227)
Weld properties (p. 229)
Weld types (p. 231)
Corner chamfer properties (p. 232)
Edge chamfer properties (p. 232)
Bolt properties
Use the Bolt Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a bolt group.
On plane The position of the panel on the work plane.
Rotation How much the panel is rotated around its axis on the work plane.
At depth The position of the panel, in terms of depth perpendicular tothe work plane.
End offset The offsets of the ends of the panel, relative to its referenceline.
Analysis tab The analysis properties of the panel.
Spanning tab The spanning properties of the panel.
Loading tab The loading properties of the panel.
Design tab The design information of the panel.
Cast unit prefix and start
number
Define the cast unit series of the panel.
Cast unit type Indicates whether the panel is precast or cast in place.
Radius The plane of curvature and radius of the curved panel.
Number of segments The number of segments required to draw a curved panel.
Option
Option
Bolt size Bolt diameter.
Bolt standard Bolt assembly standard/grade.
Bolt type Defines whether the bolts are assembled on-site or in the shop.
Connect part/
assembly
Indicates whether you are bolting a secondary part or a sub-assembly.
Thread in material Indicates if the thread of the bolt can be inside the bolted parts.Tekla Structures does not use this value when calculating the lengthof full-threaded bolts.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 228/260
228 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
Cut length Indicates which parts the bolt connects. The value defines the areaTekla Structures should search for parts that belong to the boltgroup. Using cut length you can determine whether the bolt will gothrough one flange or two.
Tekla Structures searches for parts using half the cut length value,in both directions from the bolt group plane. In the illustrationbelow, A is the cut length and B is the bolt origin. Tekla Structurescalculates the search area as A/2 in both directions from point B.
Tekla Structures warns you if the cut length is too small (i.e. thebolt group contains no parts) and makes the bolt length 100 mm.
If there are large gaps between the connected parts, the gap is addedto the length of the bolt. Tekla Structures calculates bolt lengthusing the the total distance between the first and last surfaces.
If you want to force a bolt to be a certain length, enter a negativevalue for cut length (e.g. -150).
Extra length Additional bolt length.
Increases the material thickness that Tekla Structures uses whencalculating bolt length. For example, you might need extra boltlength to allow for painting. You can also build additional lengthsinto bolt assemblies.
Shape Bolt group shape.
Bolt dist X Bolt spacing, number, or co-ordinate, depending on the bolt groupshape.
Bolt dist Y Bolt spacing, group diameter, or coordinate, depending on the boltgroup shape.
Tolerance Tolerance = Hole diameter - Bolt diameter
Hole type Oversized or slotted. Field activates after you select the Parts with
slotted holes check boxes.
Slotted hole X x allowance of a slotted hole. Zero for a round hole.
Slotted hole Y y allowance of a slotted hole. Zero for a round hole.
Rotate Slots If the bolt connects several parts, you may want to rotate alternateholes by 90 degrees. This allows the bolt to move in differentdirections.
Option
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 229/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 229
Modeling Settings
See also Bolts (p. 85)
Weld properties
Use the Weld Properties dialog box to view or modify the properties of a weld.
On plane Moves the bolt group perpendicular to the bolt group x axis.
Rotation Defines how far the bolt group is rotated around the x axis, relativeto the current work plane.
For example, you can use this field to indicate on which side of theconnected parts you want the bolt head to be.
At depth Moves the bolt group perpendicular to the current work plane.
Dx, Dy, Dz Offsets that move the bolt group by moving the bolt group x axis.
Option
Some of the properties are only displayed in reports, not in drawings.
Option
Prefix See Weld size prefixes (p. 93).
Size The size of the weld.
If you enter a zero or negative weld size, Tekla Structures createsthe weld, but does not display it drawings.
Type See Weld types (p. 231).
Angle The angle of weld preparation, bevels, or groove.
Tekla Structures displays the angle between the weld type symboland the fill type contour symbol.
Contour The fill type contour of a weld can be:
• None
• Flush
• Convex
• Concave
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 230/260
230 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
Finish Tekla Structures displays the finish symbol above the weld typesymbol in drawings. The options are:
• G (Grind)
• M (Machine)
• C (Chip)
• (Flush finished weld)
• (Smooth blended weld face)
Length The length of a regular weld depends on the length of theconnection between the welded parts. You can set the exact lengthof a polygon weld by, for example, defining the start and end pointsof the weld.
Intermittent weld Indicates whether the weld is an intermittent weld.
Intermittent welds are staggered on both sides of the part beingwelded. Tekla Structures shows the weld type symbols as staggeredin weld symbols.
Pitch The center-to-center spacing of welds for non-continuous welds.
To create a non-continuous weld, define the center-to-centerspacing and the pitch of the welds. Tekla Structures calculates thedistance between the welds as the pitch minus the length of theweld.
Tekla Structures uses the – character by default to separate weldlength and pitch, for example 50–100. To change the separator to@, for example, set the advanced optionXS_WELD_LENGTH_CC_SEPARATOR_CHAR to @.
Root face Root face thickness is the height of the narrowest part inside the
root opening. The RFT fields in the connection dialog boxes alsorefer to the root face thickness.
Neither root face nor RFT values appear in drawings, but you canuse the WELD_ROOT_FACE_THICKNESS field in reports to show theroot face dimension in the weld list.
Effective throat The weld size used in weld strength calculation.
Root opening The space between the welded parts.
Reference text Additional information to appear in the weld symbol. For example,information about the weld specification or process.
Edge/Around Indicates whether only one edge or the entire perimeter of a faceshould be welded.
A circle in the weld symbol in drawings indicates the Around option has been used.
Workshop/Site Indicates where the weld should be made. This setting affectsassemblies and drawings.
Tekla Structures indicates site welds in the weld symbol using aflag.
NDT inspection
level
Defines the non-desctructive testing and inspection level.
Connect part/
assembly
See Using welds to create assemblies (p. 72).
Position See Weld position (p. 92).
Option
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 231/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 231
Modeling Settings
See also Welds (p. 91)
Weld types
Use the Weld Properties dialog box to define the weld type. Some weld types alsoautomatically prepare the parts to be welded. The following table shows the available weldtypes:
Electrode
classification
Defines the weld electrode classification.
Electrode strength Defines the electrode strength.
Electrode
coefficient
Defines the electrode strength coefficient.
Welding process
type
Defines the process type.
Option
Weldtype Name Number Preparation
None 0 No
Fillet weld 10 No
Bevel-groove (single-V buttweld)
3 Both parts
Bevel-groove (single-bevelbutt weld)
4 Secondary part
Square-groove (square buttweld)
2 No
Single-V butt weld withbroad root face
5 Both edges
Single-bevel butt weld withbroad root face
6 Secondary part
U-groove weld (single-Ubutt weld)
7 Both parts
J-groove weld (single-J buttweld)
8 Secondary part
Flare V-groove weld 16 Both parts
Flare-bevel-groove weld 15 Secondary part
Edge-flange weld 1 No
Corner-flange weld 17 No
Plug weld 11 No
Bevel backing weld 9 No
Spot weld 12 No
Seam weld 13 No
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 232/260
232 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
Corner chamfer properties
Use the Chamfer Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of a corner chamfer.
See also Chamfering part corners(p. 105)
Edge chamfer properties
Use the Edge Chamfer Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties of an edgechamfer.
Slot weld 14 No
Partial penetration weld
(single-bevel butt + fillet)
18 Secondary part
Partial penetration weld(square groove + fillet)
19 No
Melt-through weld 20 No
Steep-flanked single-V buttweld
21 No
Steep-flanked single-bevelbutt weld
22 No
Edge weld 23 No
Surfacing weld 24 No
Fold joint 25 No
Inclined joint 26 No
Weldtype Name Number Preparation
Option
Type The shape of the chamfer.
x The dimensions of the chamfer. The dimension depends on thechamfer type.
y
dz1 Only used for contour plates and concrete slabs.
Moves the top or bottom surface of the part corner in the part’slocal z direction.
Use these fields, for example, to give plates varyingthicknesses.
dz2
Field Description More information
Type The shape of the chamfer.
Name The name of the chamfer.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 233/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 233
Modeling Settings
See also Chamfering part edges (p. 107)
8.5 Numbering sett ings
This section provides more information about specific numbering settings.
See also General numbering settings (p. 233)
Weld numbering settings (p. 234)
Control number settings (p. 235)
General numbering settings
Use the Numbering Setup dialog box to view and modify some general numbering settings.
Cutting distance
in X direction
Defines how far away from thechamfered edge the chamfer willend in the x direction.
Cutting distance
in Y direction
Defines how far away from the
chamfered edge the chamfer willend in the y direction.
First end type The shape and position of thefirst end point.
The options are:
• Full: The end point is
positioned at the end of thepart (moving along thenearest edge), and the shapeis straight.
• Straight: The end point is
positioned at the point youpick, and the shape isstraight.
• Bevelled: The end point ispositioned at the point youpick, and the shape is angled.
Second end type The shape and position of thesecond end point.
Dimension The distance between the(picked) end point and thebevelled points.
Field Description More information
Option
Renumber all All parts get a new number. All information on previousnumbers is lost.
Re-use old numbers Tekla Structures reuses the numbers of parts that have beendeleted. These numbers may be used to number new ormodified parts.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 234/260
234 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Creating a standard-part model (p. 160)
Weld numbering settingsUse the Weld Numbering dialog box to view and modify the weld numbering settings. Theweld number is displayed in drawings and weld reports.
Check for standard parts If a separate standard-part model has been set up, TeklaStructures compares the parts in the current model to those inthe standard-part model.
If the part to be numbered is identical to a part in the standard-
part model, Tekla Structures uses the same part number as inthe standard-part model.
Compare to old The part gets the same number as a previously numberedsimilar part.
Take new number The part gets a new number even if a similar numbered partalready exists.
Keep number if possible Modified parts maintain their previous numbers if possible.
Synchronize with master
model
Use this setting when working in multi-user mode. TeklaStructures locks the master model and performs a save,numbering, and save sequence, so that all other users cancontinue working during the operation.
Automatic cloning If the main part of a drawing is modified and therefore gets anew assembly position, the existing drawing is automaticallyassigned to another part of the position.
If the modified part moves to an assembly position that doesnot have a drawing, the original drawing is automaticallycloned to reflect the changes in the modified part.
Holes The location, size, and number of holes affects numbering.
Part name The part name affects numbering.
Beam orientation The orientation of beams affects numbering.
Column orientation The orientation of columns affects numbering.
Reinforcing bars The orientation of reinforcing bars affects numbering.
Embedded objects The orientation of equal embedded objects affects numbering.
Surface treatment Surface treatments affect the numbering of assemblies.
Tolerance Parts can get the same number if they do not differ more thanas set in this input field.
Assembly position sort
order
See Assembly position numbers (p. 157).
Option
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 235/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 235
Modeling Settings
See also Numbering objects (p. 156)
Control number settings
Use the Create control numbers (S9) dialog box to view and modify the control numbersettings.
See also Control numbers (p. 158)
Option
Start number The number from which the numberingstarts. Tekla Structures automaticallysuggests the following free number as the
start number.Apply for Defines which objects are affected by the
change.
All welds changes the number of all welds inthe model.
Selected welds changes the number of theselected welds without affecting others.
Renumber also welds that have a number Tekla Structures replaces existing weldnumbers.
Re-use numbers of deleted welds If some welds have been removed, TeklaStructures uses their numbers when
numbering other welds.
Option
Numbering Defines which parts get control numbers.All creates consecutive numbers for all parts.
By numbering series creates controlnumbers for parts in a specific numberingseries.
Assembly/Cast unit numbering series Defines the prefix and start number of thenumbering series for which to create controlnumbers.
Needed only with the By numbering series option.
Start number of control numbers The number from which the numberingstarts.
Step value Defines the interval between two controlnumbers.
Renumber Defines how to treat parts that already havecontrol numbers.
Yes replaces the existing control numbers.
No keeps the existing control numbers.
First direction Defines in what order to assign controlnumbers.
Second direction
Third direction
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 236/260
236 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Settings
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 237/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 237
Modeling Tips
9 Modeling Tips
This section provides useful hints and tips that help you to model structures more quickly andaccurately, and avoid potential problems with templates and drawings.
Contents • General modeling tips (p. 237)
• Part positioning tips (p. 241)
9.1 General modeling t ips
These tips will help you to use some basic modeling functionalities more efficiently.
See also Defining default part properties (p. 237)
Copying and moving efficiently (p. 238)
Modeling identical areas (p. 238)
Selecting values from the model (p. 238)
Activating an overlapping view (p. 239)
Finding RGB values for colors (p. 239)
Right-hand rule (p. 239)
Hiding cut lines in a view (p. 240)
Cutting efficiently (p. 240)
Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports (p. 241)
Defining default part properties
Save time by saving a default set of properties for each part you plan to create before you startmodeling.
To define default sets of part properties for a project:
1. Double-click a part to open the part properties dialog box.
2. Enter the part properties you want to use as defaults.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 238/260
238 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Tips
3. In the box next to the Save as button, enter a name for the set of properties. Forexample, enter BEAM.
4. Click Save as to save the set of properties.
5. Click OK to close the part properties dialog box.
6. Continue to save sets of properties for each type of part you intend to create.
7. To make the sets of part properties you have defined the default sets for this project,
click Tools > Defaults > Save Defaults.
Copying and moving efficiently
You can keep the Move and Copy dialog boxes open if you are going to use them often, for
example, when creating grids and levels in a new model.To keep a dialog box open while modeling:
1. Start the Move or Copy command.
2. To stop copying or moving objects, right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-upmenu.
The dialog box remains open on the screen.
3. To continue copying or moving objects:
a Click the dialog box to activate it.
b Select an object.
c Enter the values you want to use, and then click the Move or Copy button in thedialog box.
See also Copying and moving objects
Modeling identical areas
Most structures contain identical areas, from simple frames to entire floors. Save time bymodeling these areas once, then copying them throughout the model. For example, create acolumn with a base plate and cap plate, then copy the column to all the locations where itoccurs in the model.
You can use this technique to create and reproduce any identical area. Depending on theproject, you may even be able to add connections before copying the area of the building.
See also Copying and moving objects
Selecting values from the model
You can select object properties and dates directly from the model. This can useful whencreating view filters, selection filters, and object groups.
Before you start, create an empty view or selection filter, or an object group.
To use a default set of part properties, open the part properties dialog boxand select an option from the list next to the Load button. Click Load toload the properties.
For a project that has several identical floors, try modeling an entirefloor, then copying it to several levels.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 239/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 239
Modeling Tips
To select values from the model:
1. Click Add row.
2. Select options from the Category and Property list boxes.
3. In the Value list box, select one of the options.
The availability of options depends on your selection in the Property list box. You canselect dates from the model only if the property is a date.
a To select an object property, click Select from model... and then select an object.
b To select a date, click Select date... to open the Select date dialog box, and thenselect one of the options.
You can either select a date from the calendar, select the review date, or define thenumber of days before or after the review date. The review date is the same asReview date in the Project Status Visualization dialog box.
See also Creating a view filter
Creating a selection filter
Creating an object group (p. 132)
Creating a visualization (p. 136)
Activating an overlapping view
When you want to pick positions from two views that partly overlap, you can use the Xmouse option. With Xmouse active, simply moving the mouse pointer over a view activates the view.
To activate a view using Xmouse:
1. Click Tools > Options > Xmouse to switch on Xmouse.
A check mark appears next to the menu option if Xmouse is already switched on.
2. To activate a view, do one of the following:
• Move the mouse pointer over the view.
• Use the Page Up, Page Down and arrow keys.
See also Views (p. 33)
Finding RGB values for colors
To find RGB values for colors:
1. Log in to the Tekla Extranet.
2. Click Tekla Structures > Self learning > Questions and answers.
3. Open the Background color in model editor document.
4. Download and install the application.
Right-hand rule
Right-hand rule indicates the direction of the coordinate axes. When you hold the thumb, indexfinger, and middle finger of your right hand so that they form three right angles, then the thumbsymbolizes the x axis, the index finger the y axis, and the middle finger the z axis.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 240/260
240 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Tips
Hiding cut lines in a view
To hide all cut lines in a view:
1. Double-click the view to open the View Properties dialog box.
2. Click Display... to open the Display dialog box.
3. Clear the Cuts check box.
4. Click Modify.
See also Cuts (p. 109)
Cutting efficiently
Follow these guidelines when cutting objects in the model:
• Avoid part faces
Avoid creating cuts that are exactly on the part planes or go through vertices. Try toposition the cut at least 0.3 mm outside of the part planes.
• Use polygon cutsWhenever possible, use polygon cuts. The Cut part with polygon command automaticallyextends the cut slightly outside of the part face. Note that after creating the polygon, youmay have to adjust the position of the handles manually.
• Use edge chamfers
Whenever possible, use edge chamfers instead of small cuts, especially in components.
• Tips for flange cuts
When cutting a flange, if the cutting part cuts very slightly the web as well (at least 0.3mm), the cut is more likely to succeed. For example, if you are cutting a beam that hasroundings, it may be useful to cut even further onto the web than just the flange thickness.
• Tips for round tube cuts
Use the Round tube (23) component for round tube cuts. The component automaticallyrotates the cutting part until a successful cut position is found. If the component fails,rotate the cutting part slightly until you find a successful cut position.
See also Cuts (p. 109)
If a cut fails, Tekla Structures displays the cutting part using dash-and-dot lines. An error notification is printed in the session history log statingwhich part and which cut caused the failure.
To locate the failure in the model, click a row that contains an IDnumber in the session history log. Tekla Structures selects thecorresponding part and cut in the model.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 241/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 241
Modeling Tips
Viewing log files
Useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports (p. 241)
Useful shor tcuts in v iewing logs and reports
Use the following shortcuts when viewing items in log files and reports:
See also Viewing log files
Viewing reports
9.2 Part posi tioning tips
These tips will help you to efficiently create and position parts in a view.
See also Modifying part length (p. 241)
Creating horizontal parts (p. 242)
Optional ways of placing objects in a model (p. 242)
Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern (p. 242)
Modifying part length
To modify the length of a part, do one of the following:
• To shorten a part, move the part handles, or use the Fit Part End command.
• To lengthen a part, move the part handles.
To Do this
Zoom to the selected objects 1. Hold down Z.
2. Click a row that contains an ID number.
Tekla Structures zooms to the correspondingobjects in the active model view.
Fit the work area to include onlythe selected objects
1. Hold down F.
2. Click a row that contains an ID number.
Tekla Structures zooms to the corresponding
objects in the active model view.
Do not cut the end of a part to shorten it. This can cause shop errors,because cuts do not always affect part length when you exportinformation to NC files.
Do not use fittings to lengthen parts. It can cause problems withconnections and details.
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 242/260
242 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
Modeling Tips
See also Part position (p. 57)
Fittings (p. 108)
Creating hor izontal parts
When creating horizontal parts, such as beams, always pick points in the same direction. Forexample, pick positions from left to right, and from bottom to top (in positive x, y directions).This ensures that Tekla Structures places and dimensions the parts in the same way in drawings,and that part marks automatically appear at the same part end.
To ensure that beam rotation is correct in drawings, set part Rotation to Top in the partproperties dialog box.
Optional ways of placing objects in a model
When you want to place an object to a position where no lines or objects intersect, you have thefollowing options:
• Use the snapping commands.• Use construction planes, lines and circles.
• Create points.
See also Snapping to positions
Construction objects (p. 40)
Points (p. 42)
Positioning objects in a radial or circular pattern
To position objects in a radial or circular pattern, do one of the following:
• Create a grid line and use the Copy Special > Rotate command to copy it.
• Use construction lines and circles to position the objects.
See also Creating a single grid line (p. 32)
Rotating objects
Construction objects (p. 40)
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 243/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 243
Index
#
3D
models...................................................................15views.....................................................................39
4D tool, see visualizing project status........................135
aabsolute coordinates....................................................30
angle dimensions....................................................... 191angles.........................................................................143
arcs.............................................................................185assemblies ...................................................................70
adding objects.................................................73, 74
changing the main assembly.................................75
changing the main part..........................................75
comparing...........................................................149creating.................................................................71examples...............................................................76exploding...............................................................76
highlighting............................................................75
joining....................................................................75lotting...................................................................174
nested assemblies..........................................73, 74numbering...........................................................157
removing objects...................................................75showing and hiding............................................. 131
sub-assemblies.....................................................71using bolts to create assemblies...........................71
using welds to create assemblies......................... 72attaching parts............................................................117
b
background color
changing................................................................23
examples...............................................................23
beams
cambering............................................................ 115concrete beams............................................ 79, 225
concrete polybeams..............................................79curved beams........................................................68
orthogonal beams..................................................69steel beams.................................................. 67, 218
steel polybeams ....................................................67warping................................................................113
bending.........................................................................65bolts...............................................................71, 85, 227
bolt group position.................................................87
bolt group shape....................................................86bolt offsets.............................................................88bolt spacing.........................................................143
bolting sub-assemblies..........................................72clash checking.....................................................148
creating...........................................................86, 88
modifying...............................................................88
c
cambering parts..........................................................115cast in place..................................................................83
cast units......................................................................81adding non-concrete objects.................................82
adding objects.......................................................82
cast unit type.........................................................83casting direction....................................................84changing the main part..........................................82
creating..................................................................82exploding...............................................................83
highlighting............................................................83
lotting...................................................................174numbering ...........................................................157removing objects...................................................83
top-in-form face.....................................................84chamfering..................................................................104
corner chamfer dimensions.................................105
corner chamfer types...........................................105corner chamfers..................................................105
edge chamfers.....................................................107in sketches ..........................................................199
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 244/260
244 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
checkingsketched cross sections......................................197
checking the model.....................................................142circles..........................................................................185
Clash Check Manager....................................... 145, 146clash checking.................................. 144, 145, 146, 149
bolts.....................................................................148changing priority..................................................147
changing status...................................................147list of clashes.......................................................146
managing results.................................................146sessions...............................................................147
symbols...............................................................146class.......................................................................51, 55
classifying information................................................167clip planes...................................................................124
coincident contraints...................................................187
colliding objects..........................................................144colors............................................................................55
background color...................................................23
background color examples...................................23color settings.......................................................213
finding RGB values..............................................239grid color.........................................................28, 31
columnsconcrete columns......................................... 78, 224
steel columns................................................ 66, 218combining parts ................................................. 116, 117
comparing parts or assemblies...................................149components
showing and hiding..............................................132
concrete parts...............................................................77beams........................................................... 79, 225
cast units................................................................81casting direction.....................................................84
columns........................................................78, 224pad footings..................................................78, 222
panels...........................................................81, 226polybeams.............................................................79
slabs.............................................................80, 225strip footings.................................................78, 223
warping................................................................113constraints...................................................................186
coincident.............................................................187deleting................................................................189
fixed.....................................................................188horizontal .............................................................188
parallel.................................................................186
perpendicular....................................................... 187vertical .................................................................189
construction objects......................................................40
construction circles................................................41construction lines...................................................41
construction planes................................................40contour plates................................................68, 69, 219
control numbers.................................................158, 159settings................................................................235
coordinatescoordinate system..................................................28
copyinghints and tips........................................................238
object groups.......................................................133object representation settings..............................135
project status visualizations.................................136corner chamfers.........................................104, 105, 232
types and dimensions..........................................105
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 245/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 245
creatingassemblies......................................................70, 71
bolts.......................................................................86cast units...............................................................82
clip planes...........................................................124concrete beams.....................................................79
concrete columns..................................................78concrete panels.....................................................81
concrete polybeams..............................................79concrete slabs.......................................................80
construction circles................................................41construction lines.................................................. 41
construction planes...............................................40contour plates..................................................68, 69
curved beams........................................................68fittings..................................................................108
grid lines................................................................32
grid views..............................................................38grids......................................................................30holes................................................................89, 90
logical areas........................................................168lots.......................................................................174
models...................................................................16nested assemblies ................................................74
object groups.......................................................132object representation settings.............................134
object type categories.........................................169orthogonal beams................................................. 69
pad footings...........................................................78project status visualizations................................ 136
screenshots......................................................... 124sections...............................................................168
sequences........................................................... 172single bolts............................................................88
sketched cross sections...................................... 184slabs......................................................................80
standard-part models.......................................... 160steel beams...........................................................67
steel columns........................................................66steel polybeams....................................................67
storys...................................................................168strip footings..........................................................78sub-assemblies.....................................................71tile patterns..........................................................100
twin profiles...........................................................70views.....................................................................35
welds........................................................91, 93, 94
cross sectionscross section sketch editor..................................181sketching cross sections..................................... 181
curved parts............................................................65, 68
Custom Inquiry ...........................................................126adding attributes..................................................127
modifying contents..............................................127cuts.............................................................................109
hints and tips.......................................................240line cuts...................................................... 109, 111
part cuts...................................................... 110, 112polygon cuts............................................... 109, 111
d
deleting
logical areas........................................................171
object types.........................................................171detail properties..........................................................227
DGNsupported objects..................................................48
dimensions
angle....................................................................191
between two points..............................................191deleting from a sketch.........................................193
horizontal.............................................................192in sketching .........................................................190radial....................................................................190
vertical .................................................................192
display settings...........................................................216distances
measuring............................................................ 143dividing models...........................................................171
e
edge chamfers...........................................104, 107, 232
end offsets....................................................................63
erection schedules............................................. 137, 139erection sequences ....................................................171
exact lines...................................................................131
examining the model ..................................................119examples
assemblies ............................................................76
background colors.................................................23creating object groups.........................................137
creating object representation settings................138creating project status visualization settings.......138
creating symmetric C-shaped cross section........204defining erection schedules.................................137
numbering..................................162, 163, 164, 165tile pattern definition............................................101
visualizing erection schedules.............................139visualizing project status.....................................136
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 246/260
246 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
explodingassemblies............................................................. 76
cast units...............................................................83exporting
sketched cross sections......................................203extrusion types............................................................200
f
family numbers...........................................................155example...............................................................163modifying.............................................................156
finding
clashes................................................................145finding distant objects.................................................149
fittings.........................................................................108fixed constraints..........................................................188flying through model...................................................123
footings........................................................78, 222, 223
g
global coordinate system..............................................28grid lines.......................................................................32
creating..................................................................32deleting..................................................................33
modifying...............................................................33properties.............................................................212
grid viewscreating..................................................................38
properties.............................................................215grids
coordinates............................................................30
creating..................................................................30
deleting..................................................................31grid color.........................................................28, 31
labels..............................................................29, 31
line extensions.......................................................29modifying...............................................................31origin......................................................................29
properties.............................................................211work plane grid......................................................27
h
handles.........................................................................57
moving...................................................................57
of positioning planes............................................196
hidingassemblies........................................................... 131
components......................................................... 132cut lines................................................................240
grid labels..............................................................31part labels..............................................................56
positioning planes................................................195reference lines.......................................................58
reference models...................................................45selected parts......................................................130
top-in-form face......................................................84unselected parts ..................................................131
work area...............................................................26highlighting
assemblies............................................................. 75cast units................................................................83
reference models...................................................45
hints and tips, see tips................................................237holes......................................................................89, 90horizontal constraints..................................................188
horizontal dimensions.................................................192horizontal position.........................................................62
i
identicalareas....................................................................238
parts.....................................................................152reinforcements..................................................... 153
importing
points.....................................................................42
sketched cross sections.......................................203inquiring
models.................................................................126object properties..................................................126
j
joining assemblies.........................................................75
l
lengthening parts ........................................................116
levels.............................................................................64line cuts..............................................................109, 111lines
exact ....................................................................131
local coordinate system................................................28
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 247/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 247
log filesviewing................................................................241
logical areas.......................................................167, 168viewing................................................................170
lotting..........................................................................174adding parts........................................................175
creating...............................................................174deleting................................................................175
removing.............................................................175
m
Magnifier.....................................................................120
materials.......................................................................54measuring objects......................................................143
angles..................................................................143bolt spacing.........................................................143distances.............................................................143
Mini Toolbar
modifying part position..........................................58Model Editor
screen layout.........................................................21Model Organizer.........................................................167modeling
hints and tips.......................................................237
identical areas.....................................................238parametric modeling............................................ 176
rendered or plan view?..........................................34Modeling of floor bay (66)...........................................114models
about 3D models...................................................15
checking for errors ..............................................142creating.................................................................16
dividing into phases.............................................171examining............................................................119flying through model............................................123
inquiring...............................................................126
moving.................................................................122numbering...........................................................151
organizing............................................................167rotating................................................................121
saving....................................................................17viewing................................................................119
zooming...............................................................119modifying
logical areas........................................................169object types.........................................................169
movinghints and tips.......................................................238
models in a view..................................................122positioning planes................................................195
using handles........................................................57
n
nested assemblies................................................. 73, 74
numbering.......................................................... 151, 156about numbering.................................................151assemblies ..........................................................157
cast units.............................................................157
checking and repairing........................................161clearing................................................................160
control numbers.......................................... 158, 159examples.................................... 162, 163, 164, 165family numbers...................................155, 156, 163
history..................................................................161
identical parts......................................................152identical reinforcements ......................................153
modifying.............................................................159numbering series.................................................154preliminary numbers............................................158
reinforcements..................................................... 157
sequences...........................................................172series..................................................153, 154, 156
settings...............................................233, 234, 235standard-part model............................................160user-defined attributes.........................................153
what affects.........................................................152
numbering settings.....................................................233
o
object groups..............................................................132
color settings.......................................................213
copying to another model....................................133creating................................................................132deleting................................................................133
example...............................................................137transparency settings..........................................214
object property report templates.................................126object representation settings.....................................133
copying................................................................135creating................................................................134
deleting................................................................135example...............................................................138
object types................................................................167viewing................................................................170
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 248/260
248 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
objectsclash checking............................................ 144, 145
defining visibility...................................................128finding distant objects..........................................149
inquiring properties..............................................126measuring............................................................ 143
numbering............................................................ 156placing objects in model......................................242
positioning...........................................................242showing and hiding..............................................128
offsets...........................................................................63opening
models...................................................................17organizing the model ..................................................167
orthogonal beams.......................................................220overlapping
numbering series.................................................156
views....................................................................239oversized holes.............................................................90
p
pad footings......................................................... 78, 222panels...........................................................................81
panning.......................................................................122
parallel constraints......................................................186parametric modeling...................................................176
profiles.................................................................176parametric profiles........................................................53part add, see attaching parts......................................117
part labels.....................................................................56
showing and hiding................................................56part properties.............................................................217
partsadding to assembly................................................74
assemblies............................................................. 70bending..................................................................65
cambering............................................................115changing the material ............................................54
changing the profile ...............................................52combining............................................................116
comparing............................................................149concrete parts........................................................77
cutting with another part .............................110, 112default properties.................................................237
hiding...................................................................130horizontal parts....................................................242
identical parts.......................................................152labels.....................................................................56
lengthening..........................................................115
lengthening in drawings.......................................116lotting...................................................................174material..................................................................54
modifying part length...........................................241numbering................................................... 154, 156
part types...............................................................52position...........................................................57, 58
profiles...................................................................52properties...............................................................51
sequences..................................................172, 173shortening............................................................115
shortening in drawings.........................................116showing only selected parts.................................131
showing with exact lines......................................131splitting.................................................................117
steel parts..............................................................66user-defined attributes...........................................55
warping................................................................113perpendicular constraints............................................187
phases........................................................................171in numbering........................................................164
plane views...................................................................39points............................................................................42
coordinates..........................................................212importing................................................................42phase and ID.......................................................212properties.............................................................212
polybeams.............................................................. 67, 79polygon cuts.......................................................109, 111
polygon shapes...........................................................112
polygon welds...............................................................93polylines......................................................................184
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 249/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 249
positionbending.................................................................65
depth.....................................................................60end offsets.............................................................63
horizontal...............................................................62levels.....................................................................64
on the work plane..................................................59rotation..................................................................59
vertical...................................................................61positioning planes.......................................................193
handles................................................................196moving.................................................................195
reverting to default ..............................................197prefixes
profile name prefixes.............................................53weld size prefix......................................................93
preliminary numbers...................................................158
preparing parts for welding...........................................94printing
screenshots......................................................... 125
priorityin clash checking.................................................147
profiles..........................................................................52parametric.....................................................53, 176
prefixes..................................................................53separators.............................................................53
sketched profiles................................................. 201standard................................................................53
twin profiles...........................................................70user-defined..........................................................53
project status visualizations........................................135copying................................................................136
creating...............................................................136deleting................................................................136
example....................................................... 136, 138properties
default .................................................................237
r
radial dimensions....................................................... 190
radius............................................................................65redrawing views............................................................39
reference lines........................................................57, 58reference model objects...............................................47
selecting................................................................48
reference models..........................................................43clash checking.....................................................144
hiding.....................................................................45highlighting............................................................45
inserting.................................................................44modifying properties..............................................44
selecting................................................................45splitting into reference objects...............................48
supported DGN objects.........................................48updating.................................................................45
viewing changes....................................................45viewing layers........................................................46
reference points............................................................57refreshing views............................................................39
reinforcementsidentical...............................................................153
numbering ...........................................................157
relative coordinates......................................................30rendered views.............................................................36
representation options.........................................128
repairingnumbering errors.................................................161
report templatesfor inquiring object properties..............................126
reportsviewing................................................................241
representation options................................................128restoring default work plane.........................................28
revertingto default positioning planes................................197
to old clash checking functionality.......................149RGB values ................................................................239
right-hand rule ............................................................239rotating
models.................................................................121parts ......................................................................59
rotation settings...................................................213rotation angle knob.......................................................58
roundholes......................................................................89
plates.....................................................................69slabs......................................................................80
s
savingmodels...................................................................17
sketched cross sections......................................198screen layout
in Model Editor ......................................................21
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 250/260
250 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
screenshotscreating................................................................124
in Windows Vista.................................................125printing.................................................................125
saving in bitmap format.......................................125settings................................................................214
sections.......................................................................168selecting
dates from model.................................................238reference model objects........................................48
reference models...................................................45values from model...............................................238
selection dial.................................................................58sequences..................................................................172
adding parts.........................................................173creating................................................................172
deleting................................................................173
inquiring...............................................................173modifying.............................................................173
settings
bolt properties......................................................227concrete beam properties....................................225
concrete column properties.................................224concrete panel properties....................................226
concrete slab properties......................................225contour plate properties.......................................219
corner chamfer properties...................................232detail properties...................................................227
display settings....................................................216edge chamfer properties......................................232
general modeling settings....................................211grid line properties...............................................212
grid properties......................................................211grid view properties.............................................215
numbering settings.............................233, 234, 235orthogonal beam properties.................................220
pad footing properties..........................................222part properties.....................................................217
point properties....................................................212rotation settings...................................................213
screenshot settings..............................................214steel beam properties..........................................218steel column properties.......................................218strip footing properties.........................................223
twin profile properties..........................................221view properties....................................................215
view settings........................................................215
weld properties....................................................229shifting the work plane..................................................27shortcuts
in viewing logs and reports..................................241
shortening and lengthening parts...............................115
shortening parts in drawings.......................................116showing
assemblies........................................................... 131components......................................................... 132
cut lines................................................................240parts labels............................................................56
parts with exact lines...........................................131positioning planes................................................195
reference lines.......................................................58top-in-form face......................................................84
views......................................................................38work area...............................................................26
single bolts....................................................................88single grid lines.............................................................32
single-part welds...........................................................94Sketch Browser...........................................................182
sketch editor................................................................181
sketched cross sections..............................................181adding constraints................................................186adding dimensions...............................................190
arcs......................................................................185chamfers..............................................................199
checking...............................................................197circles...................................................................185
creating................................................................184creating images...................................................201
example...............................................................204exporting.....................................................202, 203
extrusion types.....................................................200importing.....................................................202, 203
modifying.............................................................198polylines...............................................................184
positioning planes...............................193, 194, 196profiles.................................................................201
refining the shape................................................186saving..................................................................198
sketch thickness..................................................199using in models....................................................201
variables..............................................................183slabs..............................................................................80
warping.......................................................113, 114slotted holes..................................................................90snapping
to middle points......................................................57
snapshots, see screenshots .......................................124splitting
parts............................................................117, 118
plates and slabs...................................................118standard profiles...........................................................53standard-part models..................................................160
status
in clash checking.................................................147
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 251/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 251
steel parts.....................................................................66assemblies............................................................70
beams...........................................................67, 218columns.........................................................66, 218
contour plates.........................................68, 69, 219curved beams........................................................68
orthogonal beams.........................................69, 220polybeams............................................................. 67
twin profiles...................................................70, 221storys..........................................................................168
strip footings.........................................................78, 223sub-assemblies ............................................................71
bolting to existing assembly..................................72welding to existing assembly.................................72
surface treatment .........................................................95adding...................................................................96
creating new surface treatments...........................99
modifying...............................................................96on all faces of part.................................................97on chamfered parts...............................................98
on cut faces...........................................................97on part face...........................................................97
on parts with openings and recesses....................98on selected areas..................................................97
tiled surface treatment...................................96, 100switching between
views.....................................................................39
ttesting
sketched cross sections...................................... 197tiled surface treatment................................................100
creating new tile patterns.................................... 100pattern definition example...................................101pattern definitions................................................103
pattern elements ................................................. 104
tipsactivating overlapping views............................... 239
copying and moving efficiently............................238creating horizontal parts......................................242
cutting efficiently..................................................240defining default part properties............................237
finding RGB values for colors..............................239modeling identical areas..................................... 238
modifying part length...........................................241placing objects....................................................242
positioning objects in radial or circular pattern....242right-hand rule.....................................................239
selecting values from model................................238
useful shortcuts in viewing logs and reports .......241
top-in-form face ............................................................84transparency settings.................................................214
twin profiles.......................................................... 70, 221
u
user interface
in Model Editor ......................................................21user-defined attributes..................................................55
in numbering........................................................153user-defined profiles.....................................................53
v
valuesselecting from model...........................................238
variablesin parametric modeling........................................176
in sketching.........................................................183vertical constraints......................................................189vertical dimensions.....................................................192
vertical position.............................................................61
view depth..................................................................128view planes...................................................................36
moving...................................................................37view settings...............................................................215
viewinglogical areas........................................................170
models........................................................ 119, 124numbering history................................................161
object types.........................................................170sequence numbers..............................................173
views.............................................................................33
arranging...............................................................39
closing...................................................................39creating..................................................................35
deleting..................................................................38
modifying...............................................................38naming...................................................................35opening..................................................................38
overlapping..........................................................239properties............................................................215
refreshing..............................................................39switching between views.......................................39
temporary..............................................................35view planes............................................................36
view types..............................................................36visibility of objects.......................................................128
visualizing project status.............................................136
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 252/260
252 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
w
warpingbeams..................................................................113
concrete parts......................................................113concrete slabs............................................ 113, 114welds....................................................................91, 229
between parts........................................................91
creating.....................................................91, 93, 94numbering............................................................ 234
polygon welds........................................................93single-part welds....................................................94weld position..........................................................92
weld preparation....................................................94
weld size prefixes..................................................93weld types............................................................231
welding sub-assemblies........................................72wire frame views...........................................................36
work area.............................................................25, 128defining..................................................................26
hiding.....................................................................26work plane.....................................................................27
restoring.................................................................28shifting...................................................................27
workspacein Model Editor.......................................................21
z
zooming
using Magnifier....................................................120
with keyboard shortcuts.......................................120zoom settings.......................................................120
zoom window.......................................................120zooming in or out ........................................................119
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 253/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 253
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 254/260
254 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 255/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 255
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 256/260
256 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 257/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 257
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 258/260
258 TEKLA STRUCTURES 16
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 259/260
TEKLA STRUCTURES 16 259
5/8/2018 39311129-Modeling-160-Enu - slidepdf.com
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/39311129-modeling-160-enu 260/260